| Index: bison/src/bison/2.4.1/bison-2.4.1-src/build-aux/texinfo.tex
|
| ===================================================================
|
| --- bison/src/bison/2.4.1/bison-2.4.1-src/build-aux/texinfo.tex (revision 0)
|
| +++ bison/src/bison/2.4.1/bison-2.4.1-src/build-aux/texinfo.tex (revision 0)
|
| @@ -0,0 +1,9172 @@
|
| +% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
|
| +%
|
| +% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
|
| +\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
|
| +%
|
| +\def\texinfoversion{2008-12-03.17}
|
| +%
|
| +% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
|
| +% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
|
| +% 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
| +%
|
| +% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
|
| +% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
|
| +% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
|
| +% License, or (at your option) any later version.
|
| +%
|
| +% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
|
| +% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
|
| +% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
|
| +% General Public License for more details.
|
| +%
|
| +% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
| +% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
|
| +%
|
| +% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
|
| +% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
|
| +% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
|
| +%
|
| +% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
|
| +% reports; you can get the latest version from:
|
| +% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
|
| +% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
|
| +% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
|
| +% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
|
| +% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
|
| +%
|
| +% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
|
| +% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
|
| +% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
|
| +%
|
| +% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
|
| +% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
|
| +% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
|
| +% tex foo.texi
|
| +% texindex foo.??
|
| +% tex foo.texi
|
| +% tex foo.texi
|
| +% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
|
| +% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
|
| +% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
|
| +% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
|
| +%
|
| +% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
|
| +% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
|
| +% full Texinfo distribution.
|
| +%
|
| +% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
|
| +
|
| +% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
|
| +% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
|
| +% they might have appeared in the input file name.
|
| +\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
|
| + \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\chardef\other=12
|
| +
|
| +% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
|
| +% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
|
| +\let\+ = \relax
|
| +
|
| +% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
|
| +\let\ptexb=\b
|
| +\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
|
| +\let\ptexc=\c
|
| +\let\ptexcomma=\,
|
| +\let\ptexdot=\.
|
| +\let\ptexdots=\dots
|
| +\let\ptexend=\end
|
| +\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
|
| +\let\ptexexclam=\!
|
| +\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
|
| +\let\ptexgtr=>
|
| +\let\ptexhat=^
|
| +\let\ptexi=\i
|
| +\let\ptexindent=\indent
|
| +\let\ptexinsert=\insert
|
| +\let\ptexlbrace=\{
|
| +\let\ptexless=<
|
| +\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
|
| +\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
|
| +\let\ptexplus=+
|
| +\let\ptexrbrace=\}
|
| +\let\ptexslash=\/
|
| +\let\ptexstar=\*
|
| +\let\ptext=\t
|
| +\let\ptextop=\top
|
| +{\catcode`\'=\active
|
| +\global\let\ptexquoteright'}% Math-mode def from plain.tex.
|
| +
|
| +% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
|
| +% starts a new line in the output.
|
| +\newlinechar = `^^J
|
| +
|
| +% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
|
| +% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
|
| +%
|
| +\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
|
| + \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
|
| +\else
|
| + \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
|
| +\fi
|
| +
|
| +% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
|
| +\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
|
| +%
|
| +\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
|
| +%
|
| +\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
|
| +\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
|
| +
|
| +% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
|
| +\chardef\spacecat = 10
|
| +\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
|
| +
|
| +% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
|
| +\chardef\colonChar = `\:
|
| +\chardef\commaChar = `\,
|
| +\chardef\dashChar = `\-
|
| +\chardef\dotChar = `\.
|
| +\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
|
| +\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
|
| +\chardef\questChar = `\?
|
| +\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
|
| +\chardef\semiChar = `\;
|
| +\chardef\underChar = `\_
|
| +
|
| +% Ignore a token.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\gobble#1{}
|
| +
|
| +% The following is used inside several \edef's.
|
| +\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
|
| +
|
| +% Hyphenation fixes.
|
| +\hyphenation{
|
| + Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
|
| + ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
|
| + data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
|
| + man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
|
| + par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
|
| + spell-ing spell-ings
|
| + stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
|
| + wide-spread wrap-around
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
|
| +\newdimen\bindingoffset
|
| +\newdimen\normaloffset
|
| +\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
|
| +
|
| +% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
|
| +% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
|
| +% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
|
| +%
|
| +\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
|
| +
|
| +% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
|
| +% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
|
| +% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
|
| +% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
|
| +% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
|
| +%
|
| +\def\|{%
|
| + % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
|
| + \leavevmode
|
| + %
|
| + % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
|
| + \vadjust{%
|
| + % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
|
| + % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
|
| + \vskip-\baselineskip
|
| + %
|
| + % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
|
| + % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
|
| + \llap{%
|
| + %
|
| + % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
|
| + \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
|
| + %
|
| + % This is the space between the bar and the text.
|
| + \hskip 12pt
|
| + }%
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
|
| +% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
|
| +% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
|
| +% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
|
| +% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
|
| +\def\loggingall{%
|
| + \tracingstats2
|
| + \tracingpages1
|
| + \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
|
| + \tracingparagraphs1
|
| + \tracingoutput1
|
| + \tracingmacros2
|
| + \tracingrestores1
|
| + \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
| + \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
|
| + \tracingscantokens1
|
| + \tracingifs1
|
| + \tracinggroups1
|
| + \tracingnesting2
|
| + \tracingassigns1
|
| + \fi
|
| + \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
|
| + \errorcontextlines16
|
| +}%
|
| +
|
| +% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
|
| +% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
|
| + \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
|
| +\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
|
| + \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
|
| +\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
|
| + \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
|
| +
|
| +% For @cropmarks command.
|
| +% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
|
| +%
|
| +\newif\ifcropmarks
|
| +\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
|
| +%
|
| +% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
|
| +% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
|
| +%
|
| +\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
|
| +\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
|
| +\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
|
| +\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
|
| +
|
| +% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
|
| +% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
|
| +% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
|
| +%
|
| +% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
|
| +% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
|
| +%
|
| +% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
|
| +% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
|
| +% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is
|
| +% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two
|
| +% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
|
| +% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
|
| +\def\domark{%
|
| + \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
|
| + \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
|
| + \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
|
| + \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
|
| + \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
|
| + \mark{%
|
| + \the\toks0 \the\toks2
|
| + \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
|
| + \noexpand\else \the\toks8
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
|
| +% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
|
| +% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
|
| +% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
|
| +% first @chapter.
|
| +\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
|
| + \ifcase0\topmark\fi
|
| + \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
|
| +}
|
| +\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
|
| +\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
|
| +
|
| +% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
|
| +\def\lastchapterdefs{}
|
| +\def\lastsectiondefs{}
|
| +\def\prevchapterdefs{}
|
| +\def\prevsectiondefs{}
|
| +\def\lastcolordefs{}
|
| +
|
| +% Main output routine.
|
| +\chardef\PAGE = 255
|
| +\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
|
| +
|
| +\newbox\headlinebox
|
| +\newbox\footlinebox
|
| +
|
| +% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
|
| +% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
|
| +\def\onepageout#1{%
|
| + \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
|
| + %
|
| + \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
|
| + \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
|
| + % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
|
| + \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
|
| + \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
|
| + \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
|
| + \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
|
| + %
|
| + {%
|
| + % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
|
| + % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
|
| + % before the \shipout runs.
|
| + %
|
| + \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
|
| + \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
|
| + % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
|
| + % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
|
| + % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
|
| + % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
|
| + % it needs to be
|
| + % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
|
| + \shipout\vbox{%
|
| + % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
|
| + \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
|
| + %
|
| + \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
|
| + \hsize = \outerhsize
|
| + \vskip-\topandbottommargin
|
| + \vtop to0pt{%
|
| + \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
|
| + \nointerlineskip
|
| + \line{%
|
| + \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
| + \hfill
|
| + \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \vss}%
|
| + \vskip\topandbottommargin
|
| + \line\bgroup
|
| + \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
|
| + \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
|
| + \vbox\bgroup
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + \unvbox\headlinebox
|
| + \pagebody{#1}%
|
| + \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
|
| + % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
|
| + % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
|
| + % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
|
| + \vskip 24pt
|
| + \unvbox\footlinebox
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + \ifcropmarks
|
| + \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
|
| + \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
|
| + \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
|
| + \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
|
| + \vbox to0pt{\vss
|
| + \line{%
|
| + \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
| + \hfill
|
| + \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \nointerlineskip
|
| + \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
|
| + \fi
|
| + }% end of \shipout\vbox
|
| + }% end of group with \indexdummies
|
| + \advancepageno
|
| + \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
|
| +
|
| +\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
|
| +{\catcode`\@ =11
|
| +\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
|
| +% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
|
| +\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
|
| + \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
|
| +\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
|
| +\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
|
| +\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
|
| +% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
|
| +% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
|
| +%
|
| +\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
|
| +\def\nstop{\vbox
|
| + {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
|
| +\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
|
| +\def\nsbot{\vbox
|
| + {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
|
| +
|
| +% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
|
| +% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
|
| +% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
|
| +\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
|
| + \def\argtorun{#2}%
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \obeylines
|
| + \spaceisspace
|
| + #1%
|
| + \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +{\obeylines %
|
| + \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
|
| + \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
|
| + \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
|
| +\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
|
| +\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
|
| +
|
| +% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
|
| +%
|
| +% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
|
| +% @end itemize @c foo
|
| +% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
|
| +% by \finishparsearg.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
|
| +\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
|
| +\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
|
| + \def\temp{#3}%
|
| + \ifx\temp\empty
|
| + % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
|
| + \let\temp\finishparsearg
|
| + \else
|
| + \let\temp\argcheckspaces
|
| + \fi
|
| + % Put the space token in:
|
| + \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
|
| +% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
|
| +% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
|
| +% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
|
| +% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
|
| +% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
|
| +% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
|
| +%
|
| +% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
|
| +
|
| +% \parseargdef\foo{...}
|
| +% is roughly equivalent to
|
| +% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
|
| +% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
|
| +%
|
| +% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
|
| +% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
|
| +
|
| +\def\parseargdef#1{%
|
| + \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
|
| +}
|
| +\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
|
| + \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
|
| + \def#1##1%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Several utility definitions with active space:
|
| +{
|
| + \obeyspaces
|
| + \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
|
| +
|
| + % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
|
| + % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
|
| + % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
|
| + % should produce a line of output anyway.
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
|
| +
|
| + % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
|
| + % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
|
| + % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
|
| + \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
|
| +
|
| +% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
|
| +%
|
| +% \envdef\foo{...}
|
| +% \def\Efoo{...}
|
| +%
|
| +% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
|
| +% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
|
| +% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
|
| +% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
|
| +% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
|
| +%
|
| +% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
|
| +% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
|
| +% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
|
| +% special case.)
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% At run-time, environments start with this:
|
| +\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
|
| +% initialize
|
| +\let\thisenv\empty
|
| +
|
| +% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
|
| +\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
| +\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
|
| +
|
| +% Check whether we're in the right environment:
|
| +\def\checkenv#1{%
|
| + \def\temp{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\thisenv\temp
|
| + \else
|
| + \badenverr
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
|
| +\def\badenverr{%
|
| + \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| + \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
|
| + not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
| +}
|
| +\def\inenvironment#1{%
|
| + \ifx#1\empty
|
| + out of any environment%
|
| + \else
|
| + in environment \expandafter\string#1%
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
|
| +% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\end{%
|
| + \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
|
| + \else
|
| + % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
|
| + \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
|
| + \csname E#1\endcsname
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +%% Simple single-character @ commands
|
| +
|
| +% @@ prints an @
|
| +% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
|
| +\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
|
| +
|
| +% This is turned off because it was never documented
|
| +% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
|
| +%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
|
| +%% but suppressing ligatures.
|
| +%\def\`{{`}}
|
| +%\def\'{{'}}
|
| +
|
| +% Used to generate quoted braces.
|
| +\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
|
| +\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
|
| +\let\{=\mylbrace
|
| +\let\}=\myrbrace
|
| +\begingroup
|
| + % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
|
| + % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
|
| + \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
|
| + \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
|
| + \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
|
| + !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
|
| + !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
|
| + !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
|
| + !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
|
| +!endgroup
|
| +
|
| +% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
|
| +\let\comma = ,
|
| +
|
| +% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
|
| +% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
|
| +\let\, = \c
|
| +\let\dotaccent = \.
|
| +\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
|
| +\let\tieaccent = \t
|
| +\let\ubaraccent = \b
|
| +\let\udotaccent = \d
|
| +
|
| +% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
|
| +% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
|
| +\def\questiondown{?`}
|
| +\def\exclamdown{!`}
|
| +\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
|
| +\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
|
| +
|
| +% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
|
| +\def\imacro{i}
|
| +\def\jmacro{j}
|
| +\def\dotless#1{%
|
| + \def\temp{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
|
| + \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
|
| + \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
|
| + \fi\fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
|
| +% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
|
| +%
|
| +\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
|
| +
|
| +% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
|
| +% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
|
| +% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
|
| +% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
|
| +% \scriptscriptstyle).
|
| +%
|
| +\def\LaTeX{%
|
| + L\kern-.36em
|
| + {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
|
| + \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
|
| + \kern-.15em
|
| + \TeX
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
|
| +% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
|
| +% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
|
| +% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
|
| +% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
|
| +{\catcode`@ = 11
|
| + % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
|
| + % if the definition is written into an index file.
|
| + \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
|
| + \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
|
| +\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
|
| +
|
| +% @* forces a line break.
|
| +\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
|
| +
|
| +% @/ allows a line break.
|
| +\let\/=\allowbreak
|
| +
|
| +% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
|
| +\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
| +
|
| +% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
|
| +\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
| +
|
| +% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
|
| +\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
|
| +
|
| +% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\onword{on}
|
| +\def\offword{off}
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
|
| + \def\temp{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
|
| + \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
|
| + \else
|
| + \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| + \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
|
| + \fi\fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
|
| +% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
|
| +% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
|
| +\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
|
| +
|
| +% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
|
| +% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
|
| +% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
|
| +% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
|
| +% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
|
| +% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
|
| +% the text is small, which looks bad.
|
| +%
|
| +% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
|
| +% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
|
| +% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
|
| +% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
|
| +% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
|
| +% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
|
| +%
|
| +\newbox\groupbox
|
| +\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
|
| +%
|
| +\envdef\group{%
|
| + \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
|
| + \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
|
| + \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \startsavinginserts
|
| + %
|
| + \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
|
| + % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
|
| + % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
|
| + % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
|
| + % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
|
| + % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
|
| + % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
|
| + \comment
|
| +}
|
| +%
|
| +% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
|
| +% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
|
| +% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
|
| +% above. But it's pretty close.
|
| +\def\Egroup{%
|
| + % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
|
| + % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
|
| + \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
|
| + \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
|
| + \egroup % End the \vtop.
|
| + % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
|
| + \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
|
| + % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
|
| + \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
|
| + % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
|
| + % group, force a page break.
|
| + \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
|
| + \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
|
| + \page
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \box\groupbox
|
| + \prevdepth = \dimen1
|
| + \checkinserts
|
| +}
|
| +%
|
| +% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
|
| +% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
|
| +%
|
| +\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
|
| +group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
|
| +where each line of input produces a line of output.}
|
| +
|
| +% @need space-in-mils
|
| +% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
|
| +
|
| +\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
|
| +
|
| +% Old definition--didn't work.
|
| +%\parseargdef\need{\par %
|
| +%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
|
| +%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
|
| +%{\baselineskip=0pt%
|
| +%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
|
| +%\prevdepth=-1000pt
|
| +%}}
|
| +
|
| +\parseargdef\need{%
|
| + % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
|
| + % paragraph.
|
| + \par
|
| + %
|
| + % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
|
| + \dimen0 = #1\mil
|
| + \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
|
| + \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
|
| + \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
|
| + %
|
| + % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
|
| + % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
|
| + % And a page break here is fine.
|
| + \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
|
| + %
|
| + % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
|
| + % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
|
| + % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
|
| + % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
|
| + % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
|
| + %
|
| + % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
|
| + % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
|
| + % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
|
| + % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
|
| + % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
|
| + % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
|
| + % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
|
| + \penalty9999
|
| + %
|
| + % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
|
| + \kern -#1\mil
|
| + %
|
| + % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
|
| + \nobreak
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
|
| +
|
| +\let\br = \par
|
| +
|
| +% @page forces the start of a new page.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
| +
|
| +% @exdent text....
|
| +% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
|
| +
|
| +% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
|
| +% That's how much \exdent should take out.
|
| +\newskip\exdentamount
|
| +
|
| +% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
|
| +\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
|
| +
|
| +% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
|
| +\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
|
| + \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
|
| +
|
| +% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
|
| +% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
|
| +% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
|
| +%
|
| +\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
|
| +\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
|
| + \nobreak
|
| + \kern-\strutdepth
|
| + \vtop to \strutdepth{%
|
| + \baselineskip=\strutdepth
|
| + \vss
|
| + % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
|
| + % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
|
| + \ifx#1l%
|
| + \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \null
|
| + }%
|
| +}}
|
| +\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
|
| +\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
|
| +%
|
| +% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
|
| +% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
|
| +% else use TEXT for both).
|
| +%
|
| +\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
|
| +\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
| + \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
| + \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
|
| + \def\righttext{#2}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
|
| + \def\righttext{#1}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + \ifodd\pageno
|
| + \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
|
| + \else
|
| + \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \temp
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
|
| +\def\includezzz#1{%
|
| + \pushthisfilestack
|
| + \def\thisfile{#1}%
|
| + {%
|
| + \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
|
| + \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
|
| + \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
|
| + \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
|
| + %
|
| + % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
|
| + % definitions, etc.
|
| + \expandafter
|
| + }\temp
|
| + \popthisfilestack
|
| +}
|
| +\def\filenamecatcodes{%
|
| + \catcode`\\=\other
|
| + \catcode`~=\other
|
| + \catcode`^=\other
|
| + \catcode`_=\other
|
| + \catcode`|=\other
|
| + \catcode`<=\other
|
| + \catcode`>=\other
|
| + \catcode`+=\other
|
| + \catcode`-=\other
|
| + \catcode`\`=\other
|
| + \catcode`\'=\other
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\pushthisfilestack{%
|
| + \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
|
| +}
|
| +\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
|
| + \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
|
| +}
|
| +\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
|
| + \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
|
| +\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
|
| + the stack of filenames is empty.}}
|
| +
|
| +\def\thisfile{}
|
| +
|
| +% @center line
|
| +% outputs that line, centered.
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\center{%
|
| + \ifhmode
|
| + \let\next\centerH
|
| + \else
|
| + \let\next\centerV
|
| + \fi
|
| + \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
|
| +}
|
| +\def\centerH#1{%
|
| + {%
|
| + \hfil\break
|
| + \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
|
| + \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
| + \line{#1}%
|
| + \break
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
|
| +
|
| +% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
|
| +
|
| +\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
|
| +
|
| +% @comment ...line which is ignored...
|
| +% @c is the same as @comment
|
| +% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
|
| +
|
| +\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
|
| +\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
|
| +\commentxxx}
|
| +{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
|
| +
|
| +\let\c=\comment
|
| +
|
| +% @paragraphindent NCHARS
|
| +% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
|
| +% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
|
| +% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
|
| +\def\noneword{none}
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
|
| + \def\temp{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\temp\asisword
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifx\temp\noneword
|
| + \defaultparindent = 0pt
|
| + \else
|
| + \defaultparindent = #1em
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \parindent = \defaultparindent
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @exampleindent NCHARS
|
| +% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
|
| +% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
|
| +% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
|
| +\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
|
| + \def\temp{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\temp\asisword
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifx\temp\noneword
|
| + \lispnarrowing = 0pt
|
| + \else
|
| + \lispnarrowing = #1em
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @firstparagraphindent WORD
|
| +% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
|
| +% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
|
| +% paragraphs.
|
| +%
|
| +% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
|
| +% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
|
| +% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
|
| +% By default, we suppress indentation.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
| +\def\insertword{insert}
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
|
| + \def\temp{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\temp\noneword
|
| + \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
|
| + \else\ifx\temp\insertword
|
| + \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
|
| + \else
|
| + \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| + \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
|
| + \fi\fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
|
| +% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
|
| +%
|
| +% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
|
| +% paragraph.
|
| +%
|
| +\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
|
| + \gdef\indent{%
|
| + \restorefirstparagraphindent
|
| + \indent
|
| + }%
|
| + \gdef\noindent{%
|
| + \restorefirstparagraphindent
|
| + \noindent
|
| + }%
|
| + \global\everypar = {%
|
| + \kern -\parindent
|
| + \restorefirstparagraphindent
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
|
| + \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
|
| + \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
|
| + \global \everypar = {}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\asis#1{#1}
|
| +
|
| +% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
|
| +%
|
| +% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
|
| +% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
|
| +% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
|
| +% which is what @var uses.
|
| +{
|
| + \catcode`\_ = \active
|
| + \gdef\mathunderscore{%
|
| + \catcode`\_=\active
|
| + \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
|
| + }
|
| +}
|
| +% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
|
| +% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
|
| +% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
|
| +% otherwise define @\.
|
| +%
|
| +% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
|
| +\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\math{%
|
| + \tex
|
| + \mathunderscore
|
| + \let\\ = \mathbackslash
|
| + \mathactive
|
| + % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
|
| + \let\"=\ddot
|
| + \let\'=\acute
|
| + \let\==\bar
|
| + \let\^=\hat
|
| + \let\`=\grave
|
| + \let\u=\breve
|
| + \let\v=\check
|
| + \let\~=\tilde
|
| + \let\dotaccent=\dot
|
| + $\finishmath
|
| +}
|
| +\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
|
| +
|
| +% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
|
| +% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
|
| +% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
|
| +%
|
| +{
|
| + \catcode`^ = \active
|
| + \catcode`< = \active
|
| + \catcode`> = \active
|
| + \catcode`+ = \active
|
| + \catcode`' = \active
|
| + \gdef\mathactive{%
|
| + \let^ = \ptexhat
|
| + \let< = \ptexless
|
| + \let> = \ptexgtr
|
| + \let+ = \ptexplus
|
| + \let' = \ptexquoteright
|
| + }
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Some math mode symbols.
|
| +\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
|
| +\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
|
| +\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
|
| +\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
|
| +
|
| +% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
|
| +% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
|
| +% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
|
| +% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
|
| +% whichever is larger.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\dots{%
|
| + \leavevmode
|
| + \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
|
| + \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
|
| + \dimen0 = \wd0
|
| + \else
|
| + \dimen0 = 1.5em
|
| + \fi
|
| + \hbox to \dimen0{%
|
| + \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
|
| + .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
|
| + .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
|
| + .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\enddots{%
|
| + \dots
|
| + \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
|
| +% Texinfo's parsing.
|
| +%
|
| +\let\comma = ,
|
| +
|
| +% @refill is a no-op.
|
| +\let\refill=\relax
|
| +
|
| +% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
|
| +% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
|
| +% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
|
| +%
|
| +\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
|
| +\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
|
| +
|
| +% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
|
| +% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
|
| +% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
|
| +\def\setfilename{%
|
| + \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
|
| + \iflinks
|
| + \tryauxfile
|
| + % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
|
| + \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
|
| + \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
|
| + \openindices
|
| + \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
|
| + %
|
| + % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
|
| + % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
|
| + \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
|
| + \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
|
| + \closein 1
|
| + %
|
| + \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Called from \setfilename.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\openindices{%
|
| + \newindex{cp}%
|
| + \newcodeindex{fn}%
|
| + \newcodeindex{vr}%
|
| + \newcodeindex{tp}%
|
| + \newcodeindex{ky}%
|
| + \newcodeindex{pg}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @bye.
|
| +\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{pdf,}
|
| +% adobe `portable' document format
|
| +\newcount\tempnum
|
| +\newcount\lnkcount
|
| +\newtoks\filename
|
| +\newcount\filenamelength
|
| +\newcount\pgn
|
| +\newtoks\toksA
|
| +\newtoks\toksB
|
| +\newtoks\toksC
|
| +\newtoks\toksD
|
| +\newbox\boxA
|
| +\newcount\countA
|
| +\newif\ifpdf
|
| +\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
|
| +
|
| +% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
|
| +% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
|
| +% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
|
| +\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
|
| +\else
|
| + \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifcase\pdfoutput
|
| + \else
|
| + \pdftrue
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| +\fi
|
| +
|
| +% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
|
| +% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
|
| +% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
|
| +% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
|
| +% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
|
| +% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
|
| +% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
|
| +% that's what we do).
|
| +
|
| +% double active backslashes.
|
| +%
|
| +{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
|
| + @gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
|
| + @catcode`@\=@active
|
| + @let\=@doublebackslash}
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
|
| +% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
|
| +% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor
|
| +% changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission
|
| +% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek.
|
| +%
|
| +% #1 is the tokens to replace.
|
| +% #2 is the replacement.
|
| +% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
|
| + \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
|
| + ##1%
|
| + \ifx\\##2\\%
|
| + \else
|
| + #2%
|
| + \HyReturnAfterFi{%
|
| + \HyPsdReplace##2\END
|
| + }%
|
| + \fi
|
| + }%
|
| + \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
|
| +}
|
| +\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
|
| +
|
| +% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
|
| +\def\backslashparens#1{%
|
| + \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
|
| + % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
|
| + \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
|
| + \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
|
| +with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
|
| +be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
|
| +output) for that.)}
|
| +
|
| +\ifpdf
|
| + %
|
| + % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex.
|
| + \def\cmykDarkRed{0.28 1 1 0.35}
|
| + \def\cmykBlack{0 0 0 1}
|
| + %
|
| + \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 k}}
|
| + % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
|
| + % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
|
| + \def\setcolor#1{%
|
| + \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
|
| + \domark
|
| + \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
|
| + }
|
| + %
|
| + \def\maincolor{\cmykBlack}
|
| + \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
|
| + \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
|
| + \def\lastcolordefs{}
|
| + %
|
| + \def\makefootline{%
|
| + \baselineskip24pt
|
| + \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
|
| + }
|
| + %
|
| + \def\makeheadline{%
|
| + \vbox to 0pt{%
|
| + \vskip-22.5pt
|
| + \line{%
|
| + \vbox to8.5pt{}%
|
| + % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
|
| + \getcolormarks
|
| + % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
|
| + \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \vss
|
| + }%
|
| + \nointerlineskip
|
| + }
|
| + %
|
| + %
|
| + \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
|
| + %
|
| + % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
|
| + \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
|
| + \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
| + \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
| + %
|
| + % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among
|
| + % others). Let's try in that order.
|
| + \let\pdfimgext=\empty
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
|
| + \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
|
| + \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
|
| + \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
|
| + \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
|
| + \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
|
| + \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
|
| + \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
|
| + \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \closein 1
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + %
|
| + % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
|
| + % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
|
| + \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
| + \immediate\pdfimage
|
| + \else
|
| + \immediate\pdfximage
|
| + \fi
|
| + \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi
|
| + \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi
|
| + \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
|
| + #1.\pdfimgext
|
| + \else
|
| + {#1.\pdfimgext}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
|
| + \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
|
| + \fi}
|
| + %
|
| + \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
|
| + % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
|
| + % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
|
| + \indexnofonts
|
| + \turnoffactive
|
| + \activebackslashdouble
|
| + \makevalueexpandable
|
| + \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
|
| + \backslashparens\pdfdestname
|
| + \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
|
| + }}
|
| + %
|
| + % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
|
| + \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
|
| + %
|
| + % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
|
| + % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
|
| + \def\urlcolor{\cmykDarkRed}
|
| + \def\linkcolor{\cmykDarkRed}
|
| + \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
|
| + %
|
| + % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
|
| + % come from Petr Olsak
|
| + \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
|
| + \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
|
| + \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
|
| + \advance\tempnum by 1
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
|
| + %
|
| + % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
|
| + % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
|
| + % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
|
| + % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
|
| + % #4 is the page number
|
| + %
|
| + \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
|
| + % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
|
| + % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
|
| + % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
|
| + % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
|
| + \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
|
| + \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
|
| + \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
|
| + \else
|
| + % Doubled backslashes in the name.
|
| + {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
|
| + \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
|
| + {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
|
| + \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
|
| + %
|
| + \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
|
| + }
|
| + %
|
| + \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
|
| + \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
|
| + \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
|
| + %
|
| + % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
|
| + \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| + \def\thischapnum{##2}%
|
| + \def\thissecnum{0}%
|
| + \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| + \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
|
| + \def\thissecnum{##2}%
|
| + \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| + \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
|
| + \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| + \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \def\thischapnum{0}%
|
| + \def\thissecnum{0}%
|
| + \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
|
| + %
|
| + % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
|
| + % al. a second time, below.
|
| + \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
|
| + \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
| + \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
| + \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
| + \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
|
| + \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
|
| + \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
|
| + \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
|
| + \readdatafile{toc}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
|
| + % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
|
| + % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
|
| + %
|
| + % We use the node names as the destinations.
|
| + \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| + \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
| + \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| + \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
| + \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
|
| + \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
|
| + \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
|
| + \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
|
| + %
|
| + % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
|
| + % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
|
| + % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
|
| + % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
|
| + % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
|
| + %
|
| + % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
|
| + % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right
|
| + % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
|
| + \indexnofonts
|
| + \setupdatafile
|
| + \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
|
| + \input \tocreadfilename
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + }
|
| + %
|
| + \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
|
| + \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
|
| + \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
|
| + \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
|
| + \advance\filenamelength by 1
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \nextsp}
|
| + \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
|
| + \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
| + \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
|
| + \else
|
| + \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
|
| + \fi
|
| + % make a live url in pdf output.
|
| + \def\pdfurl#1{%
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
|
| + % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
|
| + % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
|
| + % people have actually reported a problem with.
|
| + %
|
| + \normalturnoffactive
|
| + \def\@{@}%
|
| + \let\/=\empty
|
| + \makevalueexpandable
|
| + \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
|
| + \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
| + user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
|
| + \endgroup}
|
| + \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
|
| + \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
|
| + \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
|
| + \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
|
| + \def\maketoks{%
|
| + \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
|
| + \ifx\first0\adn0
|
| + \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
|
| + \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
|
| + \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
|
| + \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
|
| + \let\next=\maketoks
|
| + \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
|
| + \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
| + \next}
|
| + \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
|
| + {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
|
| + \def\pdflink#1{%
|
| + \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
|
| + \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
|
| + \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
|
| +\else
|
| + % non-pdf mode
|
| + \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
|
| + \let\pdfurl = \gobble
|
| + \let\endlink = \relax
|
| + \let\setcolor = \gobble
|
| + \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
|
| + \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
|
| +\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{fonts,}
|
| +
|
| +% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
|
| +% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
|
| +% italics, not bold italics.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\setfontstyle#1{%
|
| + \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
|
| + \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
|
| +
|
| +\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
|
| +\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
|
| +\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
|
| +\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
|
| +\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
|
| +
|
| +% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
|
| +% in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh.
|
| +\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
|
| +
|
| +% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
|
| +% So we set up a \sf.
|
| +\newfam\sffam
|
| +\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
|
| +\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
|
| +
|
| +% We don't need math for this font style.
|
| +\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% Default leading.
|
| +\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
|
| +
|
| +% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
|
| +% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
|
| +% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
|
| +\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
|
| +\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
|
| +%
|
| +% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
|
| +\def\baselinefactor{1}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\setleading#1{%
|
| + \dimen0 = #1\relax
|
| + \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
|
| + \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
|
| + \normalbaselines
|
| + \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
|
| + \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
|
| + depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
|
| +%
|
| +% do nothing with this by default.
|
| +\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
|
| +\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
|
| +\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
|
| +
|
| +% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
|
| +% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
|
| +% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
|
| +\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
| + \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
| +%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
| +%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
| +%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
|
| +%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
|
| +%%Version: 1.000
|
| +%%EndComments
|
| +/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
| +12 dict begin
|
| +begincmap
|
| +/CIDSystemInfo
|
| +<< /Registry (TeX)
|
| +/Ordering (OT1)
|
| +/Supplement 0
|
| +>> def
|
| +/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
|
| +/CMapType 2 def
|
| +1 begincodespacerange
|
| +<00> <7F>
|
| +endcodespacerange
|
| +8 beginbfrange
|
| +<00> <01> <0393>
|
| +<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
| +<23> <26> <0023>
|
| +<28> <3B> <0028>
|
| +<3F> <5B> <003F>
|
| +<5D> <5E> <005D>
|
| +<61> <7A> <0061>
|
| +<7B> <7C> <2013>
|
| +endbfrange
|
| +40 beginbfchar
|
| +<02> <0398>
|
| +<03> <039B>
|
| +<04> <039E>
|
| +<05> <03A0>
|
| +<06> <03A3>
|
| +<07> <03D2>
|
| +<08> <03A6>
|
| +<0B> <00660066>
|
| +<0C> <00660069>
|
| +<0D> <0066006C>
|
| +<0E> <006600660069>
|
| +<0F> <00660066006C>
|
| +<10> <0131>
|
| +<11> <0237>
|
| +<12> <0060>
|
| +<13> <00B4>
|
| +<14> <02C7>
|
| +<15> <02D8>
|
| +<16> <00AF>
|
| +<17> <02DA>
|
| +<18> <00B8>
|
| +<19> <00DF>
|
| +<1A> <00E6>
|
| +<1B> <0153>
|
| +<1C> <00F8>
|
| +<1D> <00C6>
|
| +<1E> <0152>
|
| +<1F> <00D8>
|
| +<21> <0021>
|
| +<22> <201D>
|
| +<27> <2019>
|
| +<3C> <00A1>
|
| +<3D> <003D>
|
| +<3E> <00BF>
|
| +<5C> <201C>
|
| +<5F> <02D9>
|
| +<60> <2018>
|
| +<7D> <02DD>
|
| +<7E> <007E>
|
| +<7F> <00A8>
|
| +endbfchar
|
| +endcmap
|
| +CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
| +end
|
| +end
|
| +%%EndResource
|
| +%%EOF
|
| + }\endgroup
|
| + \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
|
| + \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
| + }%
|
| +%
|
| +% \cmapOT1IT
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
| + \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
| +%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
| +%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
| +%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
|
| +%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
|
| +%%Version: 1.000
|
| +%%EndComments
|
| +/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
| +12 dict begin
|
| +begincmap
|
| +/CIDSystemInfo
|
| +<< /Registry (TeX)
|
| +/Ordering (OT1IT)
|
| +/Supplement 0
|
| +>> def
|
| +/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
|
| +/CMapType 2 def
|
| +1 begincodespacerange
|
| +<00> <7F>
|
| +endcodespacerange
|
| +8 beginbfrange
|
| +<00> <01> <0393>
|
| +<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
| +<25> <26> <0025>
|
| +<28> <3B> <0028>
|
| +<3F> <5B> <003F>
|
| +<5D> <5E> <005D>
|
| +<61> <7A> <0061>
|
| +<7B> <7C> <2013>
|
| +endbfrange
|
| +42 beginbfchar
|
| +<02> <0398>
|
| +<03> <039B>
|
| +<04> <039E>
|
| +<05> <03A0>
|
| +<06> <03A3>
|
| +<07> <03D2>
|
| +<08> <03A6>
|
| +<0B> <00660066>
|
| +<0C> <00660069>
|
| +<0D> <0066006C>
|
| +<0E> <006600660069>
|
| +<0F> <00660066006C>
|
| +<10> <0131>
|
| +<11> <0237>
|
| +<12> <0060>
|
| +<13> <00B4>
|
| +<14> <02C7>
|
| +<15> <02D8>
|
| +<16> <00AF>
|
| +<17> <02DA>
|
| +<18> <00B8>
|
| +<19> <00DF>
|
| +<1A> <00E6>
|
| +<1B> <0153>
|
| +<1C> <00F8>
|
| +<1D> <00C6>
|
| +<1E> <0152>
|
| +<1F> <00D8>
|
| +<21> <0021>
|
| +<22> <201D>
|
| +<23> <0023>
|
| +<24> <00A3>
|
| +<27> <2019>
|
| +<3C> <00A1>
|
| +<3D> <003D>
|
| +<3E> <00BF>
|
| +<5C> <201C>
|
| +<5F> <02D9>
|
| +<60> <2018>
|
| +<7D> <02DD>
|
| +<7E> <007E>
|
| +<7F> <00A8>
|
| +endbfchar
|
| +endcmap
|
| +CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
| +end
|
| +end
|
| +%%EndResource
|
| +%%EOF
|
| + }\endgroup
|
| + \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
|
| + \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
| + }%
|
| +%
|
| +% \cmapOT1TT
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
|
| + \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
|
| +%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
| +%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
|
| +%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
|
| +%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
|
| +%%Version: 1.000
|
| +%%EndComments
|
| +/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
|
| +12 dict begin
|
| +begincmap
|
| +/CIDSystemInfo
|
| +<< /Registry (TeX)
|
| +/Ordering (OT1TT)
|
| +/Supplement 0
|
| +>> def
|
| +/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
|
| +/CMapType 2 def
|
| +1 begincodespacerange
|
| +<00> <7F>
|
| +endcodespacerange
|
| +5 beginbfrange
|
| +<00> <01> <0393>
|
| +<09> <0A> <03A8>
|
| +<21> <26> <0021>
|
| +<28> <5F> <0028>
|
| +<61> <7E> <0061>
|
| +endbfrange
|
| +32 beginbfchar
|
| +<02> <0398>
|
| +<03> <039B>
|
| +<04> <039E>
|
| +<05> <03A0>
|
| +<06> <03A3>
|
| +<07> <03D2>
|
| +<08> <03A6>
|
| +<0B> <2191>
|
| +<0C> <2193>
|
| +<0D> <0027>
|
| +<0E> <00A1>
|
| +<0F> <00BF>
|
| +<10> <0131>
|
| +<11> <0237>
|
| +<12> <0060>
|
| +<13> <00B4>
|
| +<14> <02C7>
|
| +<15> <02D8>
|
| +<16> <00AF>
|
| +<17> <02DA>
|
| +<18> <00B8>
|
| +<19> <00DF>
|
| +<1A> <00E6>
|
| +<1B> <0153>
|
| +<1C> <00F8>
|
| +<1D> <00C6>
|
| +<1E> <0152>
|
| +<1F> <00D8>
|
| +<20> <2423>
|
| +<27> <2019>
|
| +<60> <2018>
|
| +<7F> <00A8>
|
| +endbfchar
|
| +endcmap
|
| +CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
|
| +end
|
| +end
|
| +%%EndResource
|
| +%%EOF
|
| + }\endgroup
|
| + \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
|
| + \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
|
| + }%
|
| +\fi\fi
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
|
| +% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
|
| +% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
|
| +% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass
|
| +% empty to omit).
|
| +\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
|
| + \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
|
| + \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
|
| +}
|
| +% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
|
| +\let\cmap\gobble
|
| +% emacs-page end of cmaps
|
| +
|
| +% Use cm as the default font prefix.
|
| +% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
|
| +% before you read in texinfo.tex.
|
| +\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
|
| +\def\fontprefix{cm}
|
| +\fi
|
| +% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
|
| +\def\rmshape{r}
|
| +\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
|
| +\def\bfshape{b}
|
| +\def\bxshape{bx}
|
| +\def\ttshape{tt}
|
| +\def\ttbshape{tt}
|
| +\def\ttslshape{sltt}
|
| +\def\itshape{ti}
|
| +\def\itbshape{bxti}
|
| +\def\slshape{sl}
|
| +\def\slbshape{bxsl}
|
| +\def\sfshape{ss}
|
| +\def\sfbshape{ss}
|
| +\def\scshape{csc}
|
| +\def\scbshape{csc}
|
| +
|
| +% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in
|
| +% Texinfo.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
|
| +% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
|
| +\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
|
| +\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
|
| +\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
| +\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
| +\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
| +\def\textecsize{1095}
|
| +
|
| +% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
|
| +\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
| +\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
|
| +
|
| +% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
| +\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
|
| +\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
| +\font\smalli=cmmi9
|
| +\font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
| +\def\smallecsize{0900}
|
| +
|
| +% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
| +\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
|
| +\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
|
| +\font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
| +\font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
| +\def\smallerecsize{0800}
|
| +
|
| +% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
|
| +\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
|
| +\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| +\let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
| +\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
| +\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
| +\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
| +\def\titleecsize{2074}
|
| +
|
| +% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
|
| +\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
|
| +\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\let\chapbf=\chaprm
|
| +\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
| +\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
|
| +\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
|
| +\def\chapecsize{1728}
|
| +
|
| +% Section fonts (14.4pt).
|
| +\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
|
| +\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| +\let\secbf\secrm
|
| +\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
| +\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
| +\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
| +\def\sececsize{1440}
|
| +
|
| +% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
|
| +\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
|
| +\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
| +\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
| +\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
|
| +\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
|
| +\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
|
| +\def\ssececsize{1200}
|
| +
|
| +% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
|
| +\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
|
| +\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| +\font\reducedi=cmmi10
|
| +\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
|
| +\def\reducedecsize{1000}
|
| +
|
| +% reset the current fonts
|
| +\textfonts
|
| +\rm
|
| +} % end of 11pt text font size definitions
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
|
| +% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
|
| +% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
|
| +% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\definetextfontsizex{%
|
| +% Text fonts (10pt).
|
| +\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
|
| +\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
|
| +\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
|
| +\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
| +\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
| +\def\textecsize{1000}
|
| +
|
| +% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
|
| +\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
|
| +\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
|
| +
|
| +% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
| +\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
|
| +\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
| +\font\smalli=cmmi9
|
| +\font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
| +\def\smallecsize{0900}
|
| +
|
| +% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
| +\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
|
| +\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
|
| +\font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
| +\font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
| +\def\smallerecsize{0800}
|
| +
|
| +% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
|
| +\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
|
| +\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| +\let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
| +\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
|
| +\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
| +\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
| +\def\titleecsize{2074}
|
| +
|
| +% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
|
| +\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
|
| +\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| +\let\chapbf\chaprm
|
| +\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
|
| +\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
| +\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
| +\def\chapecsize{1440}
|
| +
|
| +% Section fonts (12pt).
|
| +\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
|
| +\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\let\secbf\secrm
|
| +\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
|
| +\font\seci=cmmi12
|
| +\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
|
| +\def\sececsize{1200}
|
| +
|
| +% Subsection fonts (10pt).
|
| +\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
|
| +\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
| +\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\font\sseci=cmmi10
|
| +\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
|
| +\def\ssececsize{1000}
|
| +
|
| +% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
|
| +\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
|
| +\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| +\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
|
| +\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
|
| +\font\reducedi=cmmi9
|
| +\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
|
| +\def\reducedecsize{0900}
|
| +
|
| +% reduce space between paragraphs
|
| +\divide\parskip by 2
|
| +
|
| +% reset the current fonts
|
| +\textfonts
|
| +\rm
|
| +} % end of 10pt text font size definitions
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% We provide the user-level command
|
| +% @fonttextsize 10
|
| +% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\xword{10}
|
| +\def\xiword{11}
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
|
| + \def\textsizearg{#1}%
|
| + \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
|
| + % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
|
| + %
|
| + \begingroup \globaldefs=1
|
| + \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
|
| + \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
|
| + \else
|
| + \errhelp=\EMsimple
|
| + \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
|
| + \fi\fi
|
| + \endgroup
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
|
| +% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
|
| +% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
|
| +% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
|
| +% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
|
| +%
|
| +\def\resetmathfonts{%
|
| + \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
|
| + \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
|
| + \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
|
| +% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
|
| +% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
|
| +% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
|
| +%
|
| +% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
|
| +% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
|
| +% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
|
| +%
|
| +% This all needs generalizing, badly.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\textfonts{%
|
| + \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
|
| + \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
|
| + \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
|
| + \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
|
| + \def\curfontsize{text}%
|
| + \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
| + \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
|
| +\def\titlefonts{%
|
| + \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
|
| + \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
|
| + \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
|
| + \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
|
| + \def\curfontsize{title}%
|
| + \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
|
| + \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
|
| +\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
|
| +\def\chapfonts{%
|
| + \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
|
| + \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
|
| + \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
|
| + \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
|
| + \def\curfontsize{chap}%
|
| + \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
|
| + \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
|
| +\def\secfonts{%
|
| + \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
|
| + \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
|
| + \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
|
| + \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
|
| + \def\curfontsize{sec}%
|
| + \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
|
| + \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
|
| +\def\subsecfonts{%
|
| + \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
|
| + \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
|
| + \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
|
| + \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
|
| + \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
|
| + \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
|
| + \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
|
| +\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
|
| +\def\reducedfonts{%
|
| + \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
|
| + \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
|
| + \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
|
| + \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
|
| + \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
|
| + \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
| + \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
|
| +\def\smallfonts{%
|
| + \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
|
| + \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
|
| + \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
|
| + \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
|
| + \def\curfontsize{small}%
|
| + \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
| + \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
|
| +\def\smallerfonts{%
|
| + \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
|
| + \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
|
| + \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
|
| + \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
|
| + \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
|
| + \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
|
| + \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
|
| +
|
| +% Fonts for short table of contents.
|
| +\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
|
| +\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
|
| +
|
| +% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
|
| +\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
|
| +\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
|
| +
|
| +% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
|
| +\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
|
| +
|
| +% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
|
| +% can fit this many characters:
|
| +% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
|
| +% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
|
| +% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
|
| +% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
|
| +% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
|
| +%
|
| +% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
|
| +% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
|
| +% --karl, 24jan03.
|
| +
|
| +% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
|
| +%
|
| +\definetextfontsizexi
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{markup,}
|
| +
|
| +% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
|
| +% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
|
| +% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
|
| +% this property, we can check that font parameter.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
|
| +
|
| +% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
|
| +% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
|
| +% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
|
| +% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
|
| +% currently in effect.
|
| +\newif\ifmarkupvar
|
| +\newif\ifmarkupsamp
|
| +\newif\ifmarkupkey
|
| +%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
|
| +%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
|
| +\newif\ifmarkupcode
|
| +\newif\ifmarkupkbd
|
| +%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
|
| +%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
|
| +\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
|
| +\newif\ifmarkupexample
|
| +\newif\ifmarkupverb
|
| +\newif\ifmarkupverbatim
|
| +
|
| +\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
|
| +
|
| +\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
|
| + \csname markup#1true\endcsname
|
| + \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
|
| + \markupstylesetup
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\let\markupstylesetup\empty
|
| +
|
| +\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
|
| + \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
|
| + \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
|
| + \def#1%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
|
| +\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
|
| + \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
|
| + \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
|
| + \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
|
| + \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +{
|
| +\catcode`\'=\active
|
| +\catcode`\`=\active
|
| +
|
| +\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
|
| +\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
|
| +
|
| +\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
|
| +\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
|
| +
|
| +\gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft}
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
| +\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
|
| +\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
| +\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
|
| +\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
| +\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
|
| +\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
|
| +\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
|
| +
|
| +\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
|
| +\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
|
| +
|
| +% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right
|
| +% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote
|
| +% from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it
|
| +% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least
|
| +% evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the
|
| +% regular 0x27.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\codequoteright{%
|
| + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
|
| + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
|
| + '%
|
| + \else \char'15 \fi
|
| + \else \char'15 \fi
|
| +}
|
| +%
|
| +% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
|
| +% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
|
| +% the code environments to do likewise.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\codequoteleft{%
|
| + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
|
| + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
|
| + % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
|
| + % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
|
| + \relax`%
|
| + \else \char'22 \fi
|
| + \else \char'22 \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
|
| +\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
|
| +
|
| +% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
|
| +\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
|
| +
|
| +%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
|
| +%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
|
| +
|
| +% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
|
| +% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
|
| +\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
|
| + \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
|
| +\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
| +\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
| +
|
| +% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
|
| +% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
|
| +\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
| +
|
| +% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
|
| +% ttsl for book titles, do we?
|
| +\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
| +
|
| +\let\i=\smartitalic
|
| +\let\slanted=\smartslanted
|
| +\def\var#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\smartslanted{#1}}}
|
| +\let\dfn=\smartslanted
|
| +\let\emph=\smartitalic
|
| +
|
| +% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
|
| +\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
|
| +\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
|
| +\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
|
| +
|
| +% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong.
|
| +\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
|
| +\let\strong=\b
|
| +
|
| +% @sansserif, explicit sans.
|
| +\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
|
| +
|
| +% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
|
| +% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
|
| +% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
|
| +\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
|
| +
|
| +% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
|
| +% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
|
| +% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
|
| +%
|
| +\catcode`@=11
|
| + \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
|
| + \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
|
| + \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
|
| + \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
|
| + }
|
| + \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
|
| + \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
|
| + \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
|
| + \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
|
| + }
|
| +\catcode`@=\other
|
| +\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
|
| +
|
| +% @t, explicit typewriter.
|
| +\def\t#1{%
|
| + {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
| + \null
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @samp.
|
| +\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
|
| +
|
| +% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size.
|
| +%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
|
| +%\font\keysy=cmsy9
|
| +%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
|
| +% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
|
| +% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
|
| +% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
|
| +% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
|
| +% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
|
| +
|
| +% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already
|
| +% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But
|
| +% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}
|
| + \nohyphenation
|
| + \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
|
| + #1}\null}
|
| +
|
| +% ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command.
|
| +\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
|
| +
|
| +% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
|
| +\let\file=\samp
|
| +\let\option=\samp
|
| +
|
| +% @code is a modification of @t,
|
| +% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
|
| +\def\tclose#1{%
|
| + {%
|
| + % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
|
| + \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
|
| + %
|
| + % Switch to typewriter.
|
| + \tt
|
| + %
|
| + % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
|
| + \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Turn off hyphenation.
|
| + \nohyphenation
|
| + %
|
| + \rawbackslash
|
| + \plainfrenchspacing
|
| + #1%
|
| + }%
|
| + \null
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
|
| +% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
|
| +% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
|
| +
|
| +% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
|
| +% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
|
| +% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
|
| +% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
|
| +% -- rms.
|
| +{
|
| + \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
|
| + \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
|
| + \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
|
| + %
|
| + \global\def\code{\begingroup
|
| + \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
|
| + % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
|
| + \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
|
| + \ifallowcodebreaks
|
| + \let-\codedash
|
| + \let_\codeunder
|
| + \else
|
| + \let-\realdash
|
| + \let_\realunder
|
| + \fi
|
| + \codex
|
| + }
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\realdash{-}
|
| +\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
|
| +\def\codeunder{%
|
| + % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
|
| + % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
|
| + % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
|
| + % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
|
| + \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
|
| + \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
|
| + \else\normalunderscore \fi
|
| + \discretionary{}{}{}}%
|
| + {\_}%
|
| +}
|
| +\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
|
| +
|
| +% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
|
| +% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in
|
| +% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
|
| +% general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
|
| +%
|
| +\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
|
| +
|
| +\def\keywordtrue{true}
|
| +\def\keywordfalse{false}
|
| +
|
| +\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
|
| + \def\txiarg{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
|
| + \allowcodebreakstrue
|
| + \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
|
| + \allowcodebreaksfalse
|
| + \else
|
| + \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| + \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
|
| + \fi\fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
|
| +% then @kbd has no effect.
|
| +\def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}}
|
| +
|
| +% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
|
| +% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
|
| +% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
|
| +\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
|
| + \def\txiarg{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
|
| + \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
|
| + \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
|
| + \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
| + \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
|
| + \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| + \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
|
| + \fi\fi\fi
|
| +}
|
| +\def\worddistinct{distinct}
|
| +\def\wordexample{example}
|
| +\def\wordcode{code}
|
| +
|
| +% Default is `distinct'.
|
| +\kbdinputstyle distinct
|
| +
|
| +\def\xkey{\key}
|
| +\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
|
| +\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
|
| +\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
|
| +\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi}
|
| +
|
| +% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
|
| +\let\indicateurl=\code
|
| +\let\env=\code
|
| +\let\command=\code
|
| +
|
| +% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
|
| +\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
|
| +
|
| +% @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
|
| +\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
|
| +\def\click{\arrow}
|
| +
|
| +% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
|
| +% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
|
| +% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
|
| +% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
|
| +% a hypertex \special here.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
|
| +\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
|
| + \unsepspaces
|
| + \pdfurl{#1}%
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
| + \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
| + \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
|
| + \else
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
| + \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
| + \ifpdf
|
| + \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
|
| + \else
|
| + \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else
|
| + \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \endlink
|
| +\endgroup}
|
| +
|
| +% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
|
| +%
|
| +\let\url=\uref
|
| +
|
| +% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
|
| +% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
|
| +%
|
| +%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
|
| +\ifpdf
|
| + \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
|
| + \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
|
| + \unsepspaces
|
| + \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
| + \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
|
| + \endlink
|
| + \endgroup}
|
| +\else
|
| + \let\email=\uref
|
| +\fi
|
| +
|
| +% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
|
| +% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
|
| +
|
| +% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
|
| +% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
|
| +% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
|
| +%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
|
| +
|
| +% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
|
| +% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
|
| +% all-uppercase.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
|
| +\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
| + {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
|
| + \def\temp{#2}%
|
| + \ifx\temp\empty \else
|
| + \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
|
| +% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
|
| +\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
|
| + {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
|
| + \def\temp{#2}%
|
| + \ifx\temp\empty \else
|
| + \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{glyphs,}
|
| +
|
| +% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
|
| +%
|
| +% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
|
| +% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\point{$\star$}
|
| +\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
| +\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
| +\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
|
| +\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
|
| +\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
|
| +
|
| +% The @error{} command.
|
| +% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
|
| +%
|
| +\newbox\errorbox
|
| +%
|
| +{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
|
| +\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
|
| +% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
|
| +\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt}
|
| +%
|
| +\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
|
| + \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
|
| + \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
|
| + \vbox{%
|
| + \hrule height\dimen2
|
| + \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
|
| + \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
|
| + \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
|
| + \hrule height\dimen2}
|
| + \hfil}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
|
| +
|
| +% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
|
| +
|
| +% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
|
| +% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
|
| +% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
|
| +% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
|
| +% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
|
| +%
|
| +% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
|
| +% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
|
| +% font height.
|
| +%
|
| +% feymr - regular
|
| +% feymo - slanted
|
| +% feybr - bold
|
| +% feybo - bold slanted
|
| +%
|
| +% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
|
| +% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
|
| +% Hmm.
|
| +%
|
| +% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
|
| +% Hope not.
|
| +%
|
| +%
|
| +\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
|
| +\def\eurofont{%
|
| + % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
|
| + % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
|
| + % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
|
| + % font installed.
|
| + %
|
| + % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
|
| + % that to the current nominal size.
|
| + %
|
| + % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
|
| + % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
|
| + %
|
| + \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
|
| + %
|
| + \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
|
| + % bold:
|
| + \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
|
| + \else
|
| + % regular:
|
| + \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
|
| + \fi
|
| + \thiseurofont
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Hacks for glyphs from the EC fonts similar to \euro. We don't
|
| +% use \let for the aliases, because sometimes we redefine the original
|
| +% macro, and the alias should reflect the redefinition.
|
| +\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
|
| +\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
|
| +\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
|
| +\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
|
| +\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
|
| +\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
|
| +\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
|
| +\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
|
| +%
|
| +% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
|
| +% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
|
| +% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
|
| +% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
|
| +%
|
| +% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
|
| +% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
|
| +% the same EC font.
|
| +\def\ogonek#1{{%
|
| + \def\temp{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
|
| + \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
|
| + \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
|
| + \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
|
| + \else
|
| + \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
|
| + \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
|
| + \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi\fi\fi\fi
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
|
| +\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
|
| +\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
|
| +\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\ecfont{%
|
| + % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
|
| + % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
|
| + % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
|
| + % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
|
| + \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
|
| + \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
|
| + \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
|
| + % bold:
|
| + \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
| + \else
|
| + % regular:
|
| + \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
|
| + \fi
|
| + \thisecfont
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
|
| +% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
|
| +% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\registeredsymbol{%
|
| + $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
|
| + \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
|
| + }$%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
|
| +
|
| +% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
|
| +% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
|
| +% so we'll define it if necessary.
|
| +%
|
| +\ifx\Orb\undefined
|
| +\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
|
| +\fi
|
| +
|
| +% Quotes.
|
| +\chardef\quotedblleft="5C
|
| +\chardef\quotedblright=`\"
|
| +\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
|
| +\chardef\quoteright=`\'
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{page headings,}
|
| +
|
| +\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
|
| +\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
|
| +
|
| +% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
|
| +\newif\ifseenauthor
|
| +\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
|
| +
|
| +% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
|
| +% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
|
| +%
|
| +\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
| + \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
| +\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
| + \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
| +
|
| +\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
|
| + \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
|
| +
|
| +\envdef\titlepage{%
|
| + % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \parindent=0pt \textfonts
|
| + % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
|
| + \vglue\titlepagetopglue
|
| + % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
|
| + \finishedtitlepagetrue
|
| + %
|
| + % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
|
| + % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
|
| + \let\oldpage = \page
|
| + \def\page{%
|
| + \iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
| + \finishtitlepage
|
| + \fi
|
| + \let\page = \oldpage
|
| + \page
|
| + \null
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\Etitlepage{%
|
| + \iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
| + \finishtitlepage
|
| + \fi
|
| + % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
|
| + % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
|
| + % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
|
| + % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
|
| + \oldpage
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + %
|
| + % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
|
| + % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
|
| + \HEADINGSon
|
| + %
|
| + % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
|
| + \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
| + \shortcontents
|
| + \contents
|
| + \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
| + \global\let\contents = \relax
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
| + \contents
|
| + \global\let\contents = \relax
|
| + \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\finishtitlepage{%
|
| + \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
|
| + \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
|
| + \finishedtitlepagetrue
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
|
| +
|
| +\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
|
| +\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
|
| +
|
| +\parseargdef\title{%
|
| + \checkenv\titlepage
|
| + \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}
|
| + % print a rule at the page bottom also.
|
| + \finishedtitlepagefalse
|
| + \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\parseargdef\subtitle{%
|
| + \checkenv\titlepage
|
| + {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @author should come last, but may come many times.
|
| +% It can also be used inside @quotation.
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\author{%
|
| + \def\temp{\quotation}%
|
| + \ifx\thisenv\temp
|
| + \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
|
| + \else
|
| + \checkenv\titlepage
|
| + \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
|
| + {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +%%% Set up page headings and footings.
|
| +
|
| +\let\thispage=\folio
|
| +
|
| +\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
|
| +\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
|
| +\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
|
| +\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
|
| +
|
| +% Now make TeX use those variables
|
| +\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
|
| + \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
|
| +\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
|
| + \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
|
| +\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
|
| +
|
| +% Commands to set those variables.
|
| +% For example, this is what @headings on does
|
| +% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
|
| +% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
|
| +% @evenfooting @thisfile||
|
| +% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
|
| +\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
| +\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
| +\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
| +
|
| +\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
|
| +\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
| +\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
| +\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
| +
|
| +\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
|
| +
|
| +\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
|
| +\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
| +\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
| +\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
| +
|
| +\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
|
| +\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
|
| +\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
|
| + \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
|
| + % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
|
| + \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
|
| + \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
|
| +
|
| +% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
|
| +% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
|
| +%
|
| +% The same set of arguments for:
|
| +%
|
| +% @oddheadingmarks
|
| +% @evenfootingmarks
|
| +% @oddfootingmarks
|
| +% @everyheadingmarks
|
| +% @everyfootingmarks
|
| +
|
| +\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
|
| +\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
|
| +\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
|
| +\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
|
| +\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
|
| + \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
|
| +\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
|
| + \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
|
| +% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
|
| +\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
|
| + \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
|
| + \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\everyheadingmarks bottom
|
| +\everyfootingmarks bottom
|
| +
|
| +% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
|
| +% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
|
| +% @headings off turns them off.
|
| +% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
|
| +% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
| +% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
| +% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
|
| +% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
|
| +% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
|
| +
|
| +\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
|
| +
|
| +\def\HEADINGSoff{%
|
| +\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| +\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
|
| +\HEADINGSoff
|
| +% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
|
| +% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
|
| +% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
|
| +% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
|
| +% edge of all pages.
|
| +\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
|
| +\global\pageno=1
|
| +\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| +\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
| +\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
| +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
| +}
|
| +\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| +
|
| +% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
|
| +% page number on top right.
|
| +\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
|
| +\global\pageno=1
|
| +\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| +\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
| +\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| +}
|
| +\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
|
| +
|
| +\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
|
| +\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
|
| +\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
|
| +\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| +\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
| +\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
| +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
|
| +\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
|
| +\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| +\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
| +\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| +\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Subroutines used in generating headings
|
| +% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
|
| +% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
|
| +% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
|
| +\ifx\today\undefined
|
| +\def\today{%
|
| + \number\day\space
|
| + \ifcase\month
|
| + \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
|
| + \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
|
| + \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
|
| + \fi
|
| + \space\number\year}
|
| +\fi
|
| +
|
| +% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
|
| +% It generates no output of its own.
|
| +\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
|
| +\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{tables,}
|
| +% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
|
| +
|
| +% default indentation of table text
|
| +\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
|
| +% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
|
| +\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
|
| +% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
|
| +\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
|
| +
|
| +% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
|
| +\newdimen\itemmax
|
| +
|
| +% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
|
| +% these defs.
|
| +% They also define \itemindex
|
| +% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
|
| +
|
| +\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
|
| +
|
| +\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
|
| +
|
| +\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
| +\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
| +
|
| +\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
|
| + \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
| + \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
|
| + \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
|
| + \itemindex{#1}%
|
| + \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
|
| + %
|
| + % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
|
| + % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
|
| + % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
|
| + % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
|
| + % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
|
| + \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
|
| + %
|
| + % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
|
| + % but leave it ragged-right.
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
|
| + \advance\hsize by\tableindent
|
| + \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
|
| + \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + %
|
| + % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
|
| + % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
|
| + \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
|
| + %
|
| + % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
|
| + % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
|
| + % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
|
| + % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
|
| + % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
|
| + % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
|
| + %
|
| + \penalty 10001
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
|
| + \else
|
| + % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
|
| + % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
|
| + \noindent
|
| + % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
|
| + % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
|
| + % eventually be printed.
|
| + \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
|
| + \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
|
| + \unhbox0
|
| + \nobreak\kern\dimen0
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
|
| +\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
|
| +
|
| +% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
|
| +\envdef\table{%
|
| + \let\itemindex\gobble
|
| + \tablecheck{table}%
|
| +}
|
| +\envdef\ftable{%
|
| + \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
|
| + \tablecheck{ftable}%
|
| +}
|
| +\envdef\vtable{%
|
| + \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
|
| + \tablecheck{vtable}%
|
| +}
|
| +\def\tablecheck#1{%
|
| + \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
|
| + that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
|
| + \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \let\next\tablex
|
| + \fi
|
| + \next
|
| +}
|
| +\def\tablex#1{%
|
| + \def\itemindicate{#1}%
|
| + \parsearg\tabley
|
| +}
|
| +\def\tabley#1{%
|
| + {%
|
| + \makevalueexpandable
|
| + \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
|
| + \expandafter
|
| + }\temp \endtablez
|
| +}
|
| +\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
|
| + \aboveenvbreak
|
| + \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
|
| + \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
|
| + \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
|
| + \itemmax=\tableindent
|
| + \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
| + \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
|
| + \exdentamount=\tableindent
|
| + \parindent = 0pt
|
| + \parskip = \smallskipamount
|
| + \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
| + \let\item = \internalBitem
|
| + \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
|
| +}
|
| +\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
|
| +\let\Eftable\Etable
|
| +\let\Evtable\Etable
|
| +\let\Eitemize\Etable
|
| +\let\Eenumerate\Etable
|
| +
|
| +% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
|
| +
|
| +\newcount \itemno
|
| +
|
| +\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
|
| +
|
| +\def\doitemize#1{%
|
| + \aboveenvbreak
|
| + \itemmax=\itemindent
|
| + \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
|
| + \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
|
| + \exdentamount=\itemindent
|
| + \parindent=0pt
|
| + \parskip=\smallskipamount
|
| + \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
|
| + \def\itemcontents{#1}%
|
| + % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
|
| + \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
|
| + \let\item=\itemizeitem
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\itemizeitem{%
|
| + \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
|
| + {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
|
| + {%
|
| + % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
|
| + % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
|
| + % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
|
| + % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
|
| + % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
|
| + % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
|
| + % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
|
| + % that's the theory.
|
| + \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
|
| + \noindent
|
| + \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
|
| + \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
|
| + \flushcr
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
|
| +% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
|
| +
|
| +% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
|
| +% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
|
| +% argument is the same as `1'.
|
| +%
|
| +\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
|
| +\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
|
| + % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
|
| + \def\thearg{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
|
| + % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
|
| + % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
|
| + % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
|
| + % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
|
| + \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
|
| + \ifx\rest\empty
|
| + % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
|
| + % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
|
| + % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
|
| + % not equal to itself.
|
| + % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
|
| + %
|
| + % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
|
| + % continuing to look for a <number>.
|
| + %
|
| + \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
|
| + \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
|
| + \else
|
| + % It's a letter.
|
| + \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
|
| + \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
|
| + \else
|
| + \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else
|
| + % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
|
| + \numericenumerate
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
|
| +% given in \thearg.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\numericenumerate{%
|
| + \itemno = \thearg
|
| + \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
| +\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
|
| + \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
| + \startenumeration{%
|
| + % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
| + \ifnum\itemno=0
|
| + \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
| + alphabet}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \char\lccode\itemno
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
| +\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
|
| + \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
| + \startenumeration{%
|
| + % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
| + \ifnum\itemno=0
|
| + \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
| + alphabet}
|
| + \fi
|
| + \char\uccode\itemno
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
|
| +% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
|
| +% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\startenumeration#1{%
|
| + \advance\itemno by -1
|
| + \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
|
| +% to @enumerate.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
|
| +\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
|
| +\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
| +\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% @multitable macros
|
| +% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
|
| +%
|
| +% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
|
| +% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
|
| +% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
|
| +% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
|
| +
|
| +% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
|
| +
|
| +% To make preamble:
|
| +%
|
| +% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
|
| +% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
|
| +% @item ...
|
| +%
|
| +% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
|
| +% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
|
| +% columns as desired.
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% Or use a template:
|
| +% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
| +% @item ...
|
| +% using the widest term desired in each column.
|
| +
|
| +% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
|
| +% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
|
| +% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
|
| +% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
|
| +
|
| +% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
|
| +% if they are.
|
| +
|
| +% Sample multitable:
|
| +
|
| +% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
| +% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
|
| +% @item
|
| +% first col stuff
|
| +% @tab
|
| +% second col stuff
|
| +% @tab
|
| +% third col
|
| +% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
|
| +% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
|
| +%
|
| +% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
|
| +% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
|
| +% @end multitable
|
| +
|
| +% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
|
| +% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
|
| +% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
|
| +% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
|
| +% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
|
| +% to baseline.
|
| +% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
|
| +%
|
| +\newskip\multitableparskip
|
| +\newskip\multitableparindent
|
| +\newdimen\multitablecolspace
|
| +\newskip\multitablelinespace
|
| +\multitableparskip=0pt
|
| +\multitableparindent=6pt
|
| +\multitablecolspace=12pt
|
| +\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
| +
|
| +% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
|
| +%
|
| +\let\endsetuptable\relax
|
| +\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
|
| +\let\columnfractions\relax
|
| +\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
|
| +\newif\ifsetpercent
|
| +
|
| +% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
|
| +% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
|
| + \global\advance\colcount by 1
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
|
| + \setuptable
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\newcount\colcount
|
| +\def\setuptable#1{%
|
| + \def\firstarg{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
|
| + \let\go = \relax
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
|
| + \global\setpercenttrue
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifsetpercent
|
| + \let\go\pickupwholefraction
|
| + \else
|
| + \global\advance\colcount by 1
|
| + \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
|
| + % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
|
| + % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
|
| + % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
|
| + \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \let\go = \setuptable
|
| + \fi%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \go
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% multitable-only commands.
|
| +%
|
| +% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
|
| +% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
|
| +% of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
|
| +\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
|
| +%
|
| +% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
|
| +% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
|
| +% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
|
| +% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
|
| +\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
|
| +
|
| +% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
|
| +%
|
| +\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
|
| +%
|
| +\envdef\multitable{%
|
| + \vskip\parskip
|
| + \startsavinginserts
|
| + %
|
| + % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
|
| + % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
|
| + % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
|
| + % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
|
| + \def\item{\crcr}%
|
| + %
|
| + \tolerance=9500
|
| + \hbadness=9500
|
| + \setmultitablespacing
|
| + \parskip=\multitableparskip
|
| + \parindent=\multitableparindent
|
| + \overfullrule=0pt
|
| + \global\colcount=0
|
| + %
|
| + \everycr = {%
|
| + \noalign{%
|
| + \global\everytab={}%
|
| + \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
|
| + % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
|
| + \checkinserts
|
| + % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
|
| + %\filbreak
|
| + % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
|
| + % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
|
| + % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
|
| + }%
|
| + }%
|
| + %
|
| + \parsearg\domultitable
|
| +}
|
| +\def\domultitable#1{%
|
| + % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
|
| + \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
|
| + %
|
| + % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
|
| + % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
|
| + % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
|
| + % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
|
| + \halign\bgroup &%
|
| + \global\advance\colcount by 1
|
| + \multistrut
|
| + \vtop{%
|
| + % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
|
| + \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
|
| + %
|
| + % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
|
| + % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
|
| + % the first one.
|
| + %
|
| + % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
|
| + % to the width of each template entry.
|
| + %
|
| + % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
|
| + % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
|
| + % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
|
| + % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
|
| + %
|
| + % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
|
| + \rightskip=0pt
|
| + \ifnum\colcount=1
|
| + % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
|
| + \advance\hsize by\leftskip
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifsetpercent \else
|
| + % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
|
| + % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
|
| + \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
|
| + \fi
|
| + % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
|
| + \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
|
| + \fi
|
| + % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
|
| + % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
|
| + % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
|
| + % For example:
|
| + % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
|
| + % @item @code{#}
|
| + % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
|
| + % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
|
| + % marking characters.
|
| + \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
|
| + }\cr
|
| +}
|
| +\def\Emultitable{%
|
| + \crcr
|
| + \egroup % end the \halign
|
| + \global\setpercentfalse
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\setmultitablespacing{%
|
| + \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
|
| + %
|
| + % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
|
| + % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
|
| + % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
|
| + % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
|
| +\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
| +\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
|
| +\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
|
| +\fi
|
| +%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
|
| +%% table. If not, do nothing.
|
| +%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
|
| +\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
|
| +\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
| +\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
| + %% than skip between lines in the table.
|
| +\fi%
|
| +\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
|
| +\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
| +\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
| + %% than skip between lines in the table.
|
| +\fi}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{conditionals,}
|
| +
|
| +% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
|
| +% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
|
| +% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
|
| +% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
|
| +% attempt to close an environment group.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\makecond#1{%
|
| + \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
|
| + \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
|
| +}
|
| +\makecond{iftex}
|
| +\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
|
| +\makecond{ifnothtml}
|
| +\makecond{ifnotinfo}
|
| +\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
|
| +\makecond{ifnotxml}
|
| +
|
| +% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
|
| +\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
|
| +\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
|
| +\def\html{\doignore{html}}
|
| +\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
|
| +\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
|
| +\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
|
| +\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
|
| +\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
|
| +\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
|
| +\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
|
| +\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
|
| +\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
|
| +
|
| +% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
|
| +%
|
| +% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
|
| +\newcount\doignorecount
|
| +
|
| +\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
|
| + % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
|
| + \obeylines
|
| + \catcode`\@ = \other
|
| + \catcode`\{ = \other
|
| + \catcode`\} = \other
|
| + %
|
| + % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
|
| + \spaceisspace
|
| + %
|
| + % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
|
| + \doignorecount = 0
|
| + %
|
| + % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
|
| + \dodoignore{#1}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
|
| + \obeylines %
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
|
| + % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
|
| + %
|
| + % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
|
| + \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
|
| + \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
|
| + %
|
| + % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
|
| + % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
|
| + % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
|
| + \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
|
| + %
|
| + % And now expand that command.
|
| + \doignoretext ^^M%
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
|
| + \def\temp{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
|
| + \let\next\doignoretextzzz
|
| + \else % Found a nested condition, ...
|
| + \advance\doignorecount by 1
|
| + \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
|
| + % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
|
| + \fi
|
| + \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
|
| +%
|
| +\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
|
| + \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
|
| + \let\next\enddoignore
|
| + \else % Still inside a nested condition.
|
| + \advance\doignorecount by -1
|
| + \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
|
| + \fi
|
| + \next
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Finish off ignored text.
|
| +{ \obeylines%
|
| + % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
|
| + % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
|
| + % would result in a blank line in the output.
|
| + \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
|
| +% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
|
| +%
|
| +% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
|
| +% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
|
| +% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
|
| +% didn't need it.
|
| +% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
|
| +\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
|
| + {%
|
| + \makevalueexpandable
|
| + \def\temp{#2}%
|
| + \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
|
| + \ifx\temp\empty
|
| + \next{}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
|
| + \fi
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
|
| +\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
|
| +
|
| +% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\clear{%
|
| + {%
|
| + \makevalueexpandable
|
| + \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
|
| +\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
|
| +\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
|
| +{
|
| + \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
|
| + \let\value = \expandablevalue
|
| + % We don't want these characters active, ...
|
| + \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
|
| + % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
|
| + % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
|
| + % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
|
| + \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
|
| + }
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
|
| +% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
|
| +% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
|
| +% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
|
| +% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
|
| +% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
|
| +% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
|
| +%
|
| +\def\expandablevalue#1{%
|
| + \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
| + {[No value for ``#1'']}%
|
| + \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \csname SET#1\endcsname
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
|
| +% with @set.
|
| +%
|
| +% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
|
| +%
|
| +\makecond{ifset}
|
| +\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
|
| +\def\doifset#1#2{%
|
| + {%
|
| + \makevalueexpandable
|
| + \let\next=\empty
|
| + \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
|
| + #1% If not set, redefine \next.
|
| + \fi
|
| + \expandafter
|
| + }\next
|
| +}
|
| +\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
|
| +
|
| +% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
|
| +% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
|
| +%
|
| +% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
|
| +% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
|
| +% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
|
| +%
|
| +\makecond{ifclear}
|
| +\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
|
| +\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
|
| +
|
| +% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
|
| +% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
|
| +\let\dircategory=\comment
|
| +
|
| +% @defininfoenclose.
|
| +\let\definfoenclose=\comment
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{indexing,}
|
| +% Index generation facilities
|
| +
|
| +% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
|
| +% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
|
| +\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
|
| +
|
| +% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
|
| +% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
|
| +% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
|
| +% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
|
| +% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
|
| +% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
|
| +% for the sake of vms.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\newindex#1{%
|
| + \iflinks
|
| + \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
| + \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
|
| + \fi
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
|
| + \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
|
| +
|
| +% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\newcodeindex#1{%
|
| + \iflinks
|
| + \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
| + \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
|
| + \fi
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
|
| + \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
|
| +% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
|
| +%
|
| +% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
|
| +% inside @code.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
|
| +\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
|
| +
|
| +% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
|
| +% #3 the target index (bar).
|
| +\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
|
| + % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
|
| + % closing the target index.
|
| + \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
|
| + % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
|
| + % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
|
| + \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
|
| + \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
|
| + \fi
|
| + % redefine \fooindfile:
|
| + \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
|
| + \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
|
| + % redefine \fooindex:
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
|
| +% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
|
| +% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
|
| +
|
| +% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
|
| +% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
|
| +
|
| +% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
|
| +% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
|
| +
|
| +\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
|
| +\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
|
| +
|
| +% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
|
| +\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
|
| +\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
|
| +
|
| +% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
|
| +% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
|
| +% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\indexdummies{%
|
| + \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
|
| + \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
|
| + \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
|
| + %
|
| + % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
|
| + % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
|
| + % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
|
| + \let\{ = \mylbrace
|
| + \let\} = \myrbrace
|
| + %
|
| + % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
|
| + % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
|
| + % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
|
| + % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
|
| + % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
|
| + % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
|
| + % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
|
| + % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
|
| + % is still getting written without apparent harm.
|
| + %
|
| + % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
|
| + % help-texinfo, 22may06):
|
| + % @macro funindex {WORD}
|
| + % @findex xyz
|
| + % @end macro
|
| + % ...
|
| + % @funindex commtest
|
| + %
|
| + % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
|
| + %
|
| + % Sample whatsit resulting:
|
| + % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
|
| + %
|
| + % So:
|
| + \let\endinput = \empty
|
| + %
|
| + % Do the redefinitions.
|
| + \commondummies
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
|
| +% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
|
| +% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
|
| +% this will be simpler.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\atdummies{%
|
| + \def\@{@@}%
|
| + \def\ {@ }%
|
| + \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
|
| + \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
|
| + %
|
| + % Do the redefinitions.
|
| + \commondummies
|
| + \otherbackslash
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\commondummies{%
|
| + %
|
| + % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
|
| + % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words,
|
| + % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
|
| + % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
|
| + % from whatever follows.
|
| + %
|
| + % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
|
| + % space.
|
| + %
|
| + % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
|
| + % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
|
| + % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
|
| + %
|
| + \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
|
| + \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
|
| + \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
|
| + %
|
| + \commondummiesnofonts
|
| + %
|
| + \definedummyletter\_%
|
| + %
|
| + % Non-English letters.
|
| + \definedummyword\AA
|
| + \definedummyword\AE
|
| + \definedummyword\L
|
| + \definedummyword\OE
|
| + \definedummyword\O
|
| + \definedummyword\aa
|
| + \definedummyword\ae
|
| + \definedummyword\l
|
| + \definedummyword\oe
|
| + \definedummyword\o
|
| + \definedummyword\ss
|
| + \definedummyword\exclamdown
|
| + \definedummyword\questiondown
|
| + \definedummyword\ordf
|
| + \definedummyword\ordm
|
| + %
|
| + % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
|
| + \definedummyword\bf
|
| + \definedummyword\gtr
|
| + \definedummyword\hat
|
| + \definedummyword\less
|
| + \definedummyword\sf
|
| + \definedummyword\sl
|
| + \definedummyword\tclose
|
| + \definedummyword\tt
|
| + %
|
| + \definedummyword\LaTeX
|
| + \definedummyword\TeX
|
| + %
|
| + % Assorted special characters.
|
| + \definedummyword\bullet
|
| + \definedummyword\comma
|
| + \definedummyword\copyright
|
| + \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
|
| + \definedummyword\dots
|
| + \definedummyword\enddots
|
| + \definedummyword\equiv
|
| + \definedummyword\error
|
| + \definedummyword\euro
|
| + \definedummyword\guillemetleft
|
| + \definedummyword\guillemetright
|
| + \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
|
| + \definedummyword\guilsinglright
|
| + \definedummyword\expansion
|
| + \definedummyword\minus
|
| + \definedummyword\ogonek
|
| + \definedummyword\pounds
|
| + \definedummyword\point
|
| + \definedummyword\print
|
| + \definedummyword\quotedblbase
|
| + \definedummyword\quotedblleft
|
| + \definedummyword\quotedblright
|
| + \definedummyword\quoteleft
|
| + \definedummyword\quoteright
|
| + \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
|
| + \definedummyword\result
|
| + \definedummyword\textdegree
|
| + %
|
| + % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
|
| + \macrolist
|
| + %
|
| + \normalturnoffactive
|
| + %
|
| + % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
|
| + % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
|
| + \makevalueexpandable
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
|
| + % Control letters and accents.
|
| + \definedummyletter\!%
|
| + \definedummyaccent\"%
|
| + \definedummyaccent\'%
|
| + \definedummyletter\*%
|
| + \definedummyaccent\,%
|
| + \definedummyletter\.%
|
| + \definedummyletter\/%
|
| + \definedummyletter\:%
|
| + \definedummyaccent\=%
|
| + \definedummyletter\?%
|
| + \definedummyaccent\^%
|
| + \definedummyaccent\`%
|
| + \definedummyaccent\~%
|
| + \definedummyword\u
|
| + \definedummyword\v
|
| + \definedummyword\H
|
| + \definedummyword\dotaccent
|
| + \definedummyword\ogonek
|
| + \definedummyword\ringaccent
|
| + \definedummyword\tieaccent
|
| + \definedummyword\ubaraccent
|
| + \definedummyword\udotaccent
|
| + \definedummyword\dotless
|
| + %
|
| + % Texinfo font commands.
|
| + \definedummyword\b
|
| + \definedummyword\i
|
| + \definedummyword\r
|
| + \definedummyword\sc
|
| + \definedummyword\t
|
| + %
|
| + % Commands that take arguments.
|
| + \definedummyword\acronym
|
| + \definedummyword\cite
|
| + \definedummyword\code
|
| + \definedummyword\command
|
| + \definedummyword\dfn
|
| + \definedummyword\emph
|
| + \definedummyword\env
|
| + \definedummyword\file
|
| + \definedummyword\kbd
|
| + \definedummyword\key
|
| + \definedummyword\math
|
| + \definedummyword\option
|
| + \definedummyword\pxref
|
| + \definedummyword\ref
|
| + \definedummyword\samp
|
| + \definedummyword\strong
|
| + \definedummyword\tie
|
| + \definedummyword\uref
|
| + \definedummyword\url
|
| + \definedummyword\var
|
| + \definedummyword\verb
|
| + \definedummyword\w
|
| + \definedummyword\xref
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
|
| +% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
|
| +% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
|
| +% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
|
| +%
|
| +\def\indexnofonts{%
|
| + % Accent commands should become @asis.
|
| + \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
|
| + % We can just ignore other control letters.
|
| + \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
|
| + % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
|
| + \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
|
| + %
|
| + \commondummiesnofonts
|
| + %
|
| + % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
|
| + % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
|
| + % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
|
| + %\let\tt=\asis
|
| + %
|
| + \def\ { }%
|
| + \def\@{@}%
|
| + % how to handle braces?
|
| + \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Non-English letters.
|
| + \def\AA{AA}%
|
| + \def\AE{AE}%
|
| + \def\L{L}%
|
| + \def\OE{OE}%
|
| + \def\O{O}%
|
| + \def\aa{aa}%
|
| + \def\ae{ae}%
|
| + \def\l{l}%
|
| + \def\oe{oe}%
|
| + \def\o{o}%
|
| + \def\ss{ss}%
|
| + \def\exclamdown{!}%
|
| + \def\questiondown{?}%
|
| + \def\ordf{a}%
|
| + \def\ordm{o}%
|
| + %
|
| + \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
|
| + \def\TeX{TeX}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Assorted special characters.
|
| + % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
|
| + \def\bullet{bullet}%
|
| + \def\comma{,}%
|
| + \def\copyright{copyright}%
|
| + \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
|
| + \def\dots{...}%
|
| + \def\enddots{...}%
|
| + \def\equiv{==}%
|
| + \def\error{error}%
|
| + \def\euro{euro}%
|
| + \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
|
| + \def\guillemetright{>>}%
|
| + \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
|
| + \def\guilsinglright{>}%
|
| + \def\expansion{==>}%
|
| + \def\minus{-}%
|
| + \def\pounds{pounds}%
|
| + \def\point{.}%
|
| + \def\print{-|}%
|
| + \def\quotedblbase{"}%
|
| + \def\quotedblleft{"}%
|
| + \def\quotedblright{"}%
|
| + \def\quoteleft{`}%
|
| + \def\quoteright{'}%
|
| + \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
|
| + \def\result{=>}%
|
| + \def\textdegree{degrees}%
|
| + %
|
| + % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
|
| + % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
|
| + % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
|
| + % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
|
| + % that starts with \.
|
| + %
|
| + % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
|
| + % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
|
| + % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
|
| + %
|
| + \macrolist
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
|
| +\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
|
| +
|
| +% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
|
| +% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
|
| +\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
|
| +
|
| +% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
|
| +% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
|
| +% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
|
| +% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
|
| +%
|
| +\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
|
| + \iflinks
|
| + {%
|
| + % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
|
| + \toks0 = {#2}%
|
| + % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
|
| + \def\thirdarg{#3}%
|
| + \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
|
| + \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
|
| + %
|
| + \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
|
| + }%
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
|
| +%
|
| +\def\dosubindwrite{%
|
| + % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
|
| + \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
|
| + \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Remember, we are within a group.
|
| + \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
|
| + \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
|
| + % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
|
| + %
|
| + % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
|
| + % get the string to sort by.
|
| + {\indexnofonts
|
| + \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
|
| + \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
|
| + }%
|
| + %
|
| + % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
|
| + % the original text, including any font commands. We write
|
| + % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
|
| + % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
|
| + % sorted result.
|
| + \edef\temp{%
|
| + \write\writeto{%
|
| + \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \temp
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
|
| +%
|
| +% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
|
| +% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
|
| +% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
|
| +% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
|
| +% sequences like this:
|
| +% @end defun
|
| +% @tindex whatever
|
| +% @defun ...
|
| +% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
|
| +% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
|
| +% the previous defun.
|
| +%
|
| +% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
|
| +% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
|
| +%
|
| +% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
|
| +%
|
| +% But wait, there is a catch there:
|
| +% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
|
| +% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
|
| +% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
|
| +% representation of the skip.
|
| +%
|
| +% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
|
| +% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
|
| +%
|
| +\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
|
| +%
|
| +\newskip\whatsitskip
|
| +\newcount\whatsitpenalty
|
| +%
|
| +% ..., ready, GO:
|
| +%
|
| +\def\safewhatsit#1{%
|
| +\ifhmode
|
| + #1%
|
| +\else
|
| + % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
|
| + \whatsitskip = \lastskip
|
| + \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
|
| + \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
|
| + %
|
| + % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
|
| + % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
|
| + % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
|
| + % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
|
| + % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
|
| + \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
| + \else
|
| + \vskip-\whatsitskip
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + #1%
|
| + %
|
| + \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
|
| + % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
|
| + % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
|
| + % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
|
| + % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
|
| + % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
|
| + %
|
| + % @deffn deffn-whatever
|
| + % @vindex index-whatever
|
| + % Description.
|
| + % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
|
| + % and the "Description." paragraph.
|
| + \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
|
| + \else
|
| + % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
|
| + % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
|
| + % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
|
| + \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
|
| + \fi
|
| +\fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
|
| +% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
|
| +% or
|
| +% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
|
| +% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
|
| +% containing these kinds of lines:
|
| +% \initial {c}
|
| +% before the first topic whose initial is c
|
| +% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
|
| +% for a topic that is used without subtopics
|
| +% \primary {topic}
|
| +% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
|
| +% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
|
| +% for each subtopic.
|
| +
|
| +% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
|
| +% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
|
| +
|
| +\def\findex {\fnindex}
|
| +\def\kindex {\kyindex}
|
| +\def\cindex {\cpindex}
|
| +\def\vindex {\vrindex}
|
| +\def\tindex {\tpindex}
|
| +\def\pindex {\pgindex}
|
| +
|
| +\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
|
| +{\obeylines %
|
| +\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
|
| +\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
|
| +
|
| +% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
|
| +
|
| +% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
|
| +% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
|
| + \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
|
| + %
|
| + \smallfonts \rm
|
| + \tolerance = 9500
|
| + \plainfrenchspacing
|
| + \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
|
| + %
|
| + % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
|
| + % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
|
| + % \initial {@}
|
| + % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
|
| + % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
|
| + \catcode`\@ = 11
|
| + \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
|
| + \ifeof 1
|
| + % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
|
| + % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
|
| + % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
|
| + % there is some text.
|
| + \putwordIndexNonexistent
|
| + \else
|
| + %
|
| + % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
|
| + % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
|
| + % it can discover if there is anything in it.
|
| + \read 1 to \temp
|
| + \ifeof 1
|
| + \putwordIndexIsEmpty
|
| + \else
|
| + % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
|
| + % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
|
| + % to make right now.
|
| + \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
|
| + \catcode`\\ = 0
|
| + \escapechar = `\\
|
| + \begindoublecolumns
|
| + \input \jobname.#1s
|
| + \enddoublecolumns
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \closein 1
|
| +\endgroup}
|
| +
|
| +% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
|
| +% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
|
| +
|
| +\def\initial#1{{%
|
| + % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
|
| + \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
|
| + %
|
| + % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
|
| + \removelastskip
|
| + %
|
| + % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
|
| + \nobreak
|
| + \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
|
| + \penalty 0
|
| + \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
|
| + %
|
| + % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
|
| + % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
|
| + % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
|
| + % we need before each entry, but it's better.
|
| + %
|
| + % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
|
| + \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
|
| + \leftline{\secbf #1}%
|
| + % Do our best not to break after the initial.
|
| + \nobreak
|
| + \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
|
| +}}
|
| +
|
| +% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
|
| +% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
|
| +% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
|
| +%
|
| +% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
|
| +% \def\entry#1#2{...
|
| +% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
|
| +% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
|
| +% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
|
| +%
|
| +% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
|
| +% --kasal, 21nov03
|
| +\def\entry{%
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + %
|
| + % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
|
| + % affect previous text.
|
| + \par
|
| + %
|
| + % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
|
| + \parfillskip = 0in
|
| + %
|
| + % No extra space above this paragraph.
|
| + \parskip = 0in
|
| + %
|
| + % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
|
| + \finalhyphendemerits = 0
|
| + %
|
| + % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
|
| + % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
|
| + % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
|
| + % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
|
| + % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
|
| + %
|
| + % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
|
| + % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
|
| + \hangindent = 2em
|
| + %
|
| + % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
|
| + % with blank space.
|
| + \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
|
| + %
|
| + % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
|
| + % columns.
|
| + \vskip 0pt plus1pt
|
| + %
|
| + % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
|
| + \afterassignment\doentry
|
| + \let\temp =
|
| +}
|
| +\def\doentry{%
|
| + \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
|
| + \noindent
|
| + \aftergroup\finishentry
|
| + % And now comes the text of the entry.
|
| +}
|
| +\def\finishentry#1{%
|
| + % #1 is the page number.
|
| + %
|
| + % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
|
| + % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
|
| + % cursed by a Unix daemon.
|
| + \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
|
| + \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
|
| + \ %
|
| + \else
|
| + %
|
| + % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
|
| + % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
|
| + % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
|
| + \hfil\penalty50
|
| + \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
|
| + %
|
| + % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
|
| + % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
|
| + % \hbox ensues.
|
| + \ifpdf
|
| + \pdfgettoks#1.%
|
| + \ \the\toksA
|
| + \else
|
| + \ #1%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \par
|
| + \endgroup
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
|
| +\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
|
| + \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
|
| +
|
| +\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
|
| +
|
| +\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
|
| +\def\secondary#1#2{{%
|
| + \parfillskip=0in
|
| + \parskip=0in
|
| + \hangindent=1in
|
| + \hangafter=1
|
| + \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
|
| + \ifpdf
|
| + \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
|
| + \else
|
| + #2
|
| + \fi
|
| + \par
|
| +}}
|
| +
|
| +% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
|
| +% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
|
| +% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
|
| +\catcode`\@=11
|
| +
|
| +\newbox\partialpage
|
| +\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
|
| +
|
| +\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
|
| + % Grab any single-column material above us.
|
| + \output = {%
|
| + %
|
| + % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
|
| + % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
|
| + % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
|
| + % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
|
| + % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
|
| + % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
|
| + % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
|
| + \ifvoid\partialpage \else
|
| + \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
|
| + % Unvbox the main output page.
|
| + \unvbox\PAGE
|
| + \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
|
| + }%
|
| + }%
|
| + \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
|
| + %
|
| + % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
|
| + \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
|
| + % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
|
| + % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
|
| + % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
|
| + % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
|
| + %
|
| + % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
|
| + % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
|
| + % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
|
| + % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
|
| + % as it did when we hard-coded it.
|
| + %
|
| + % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
|
| + % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
|
| + % been clobbered.
|
| + %
|
| + \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
|
| + \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
|
| + \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
|
| + \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
| + %
|
| + % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
|
| + % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
|
| + \vsize = 2\vsize
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
|
| +% the last.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\doublecolumnout{%
|
| + \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
|
| + % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
|
| + % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
|
| + % previous page.
|
| + \dimen@ = \vsize
|
| + \divide\dimen@ by 2
|
| + \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
|
| + %
|
| + % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
|
| + \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
|
| + \onepageout\pagesofar
|
| + \unvbox255
|
| + \penalty\outputpenalty
|
| +}
|
| +%
|
| +% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
|
| +% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
|
| +\def\pagesofar{%
|
| + \unvbox\partialpage
|
| + %
|
| + \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
| + \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
|
| + \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
|
| +}
|
| +%
|
| +% All done with double columns.
|
| +\def\enddoublecolumns{%
|
| + % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
|
| + % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
|
| + % following situation:
|
| + %
|
| + % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
|
| + % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
|
| + % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
|
| + % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
|
| + % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
|
| + % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
|
| + % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
|
| + % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
|
| + % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
|
| + % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
|
| + % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
|
| + % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
|
| + % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
|
| + % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
|
| + % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
|
| + % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
|
| + % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
|
| + % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
|
| + % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
|
| + %
|
| + % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
|
| + % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
|
| + \penalty0
|
| + %
|
| + \output = {%
|
| + % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
|
| + % current page, no automatic page break.
|
| + \balancecolumns
|
| + %
|
| + % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
|
| + % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
|
| + % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
|
| + % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
|
| + % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
|
| + % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
|
| + % the output somewhat more palatable.)
|
| + \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \eject
|
| + \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
|
| + %
|
| + % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
|
| + % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
|
| + % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
|
| + % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
|
| + \pagegoal = \vsize
|
| +}
|
| +%
|
| +% Called at the end of the double column material.
|
| +\def\balancecolumns{%
|
| + \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
|
| + \dimen@ = \ht0
|
| + \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
|
| + \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
|
| + \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
|
| + %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
|
| + \splittopskip = \topskip
|
| + % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
|
| + {%
|
| + \vbadness = 10000
|
| + \loop
|
| + \global\setbox3 = \copy0
|
| + \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
|
| + \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
|
| + \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
|
| + \repeat
|
| + }%
|
| + %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
|
| + \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
|
| + \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
|
| + %
|
| + \pagesofar
|
| +}
|
| +\catcode`\@ = \other
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{sectioning,}
|
| +% Chapters, sections, etc.
|
| +
|
| +% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered
|
| +% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
|
| +% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
|
| +% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
|
| +% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
|
| +\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
|
| +\newcount\chapno
|
| +\newcount\secno \secno=0
|
| +\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
|
| +\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
|
| +
|
| +% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
|
| +\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
|
| +%
|
| +% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
|
| +% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
|
| +% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
|
| +% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\appendixletter{%
|
| + \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
|
| + \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
|
| + % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
|
| + % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
|
| + % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
|
| + % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
|
| + \else\char\the\appendixno
|
| + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
| + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
| +
|
| +% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
|
| +% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
|
| +% these. @section does likewise.
|
| +\def\thischapter{}
|
| +\def\thischapternum{}
|
| +\def\thischaptername{}
|
| +\def\thissection{}
|
| +\def\thissectionnum{}
|
| +\def\thissectionname{}
|
| +
|
| +\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
|
| +\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
|
| +
|
| +% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
|
| +\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
|
| +\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
|
| +
|
| +% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
|
| +\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
|
| +\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
|
| +
|
| +% we only have subsub.
|
| +\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
|
| +%
|
| +% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
|
| +% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
|
| +\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
|
| +%
|
| +% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
|
| +% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
|
| +\def\chapheadtype{N}
|
| +
|
| +% Choose a heading macro
|
| +% #1 is heading type
|
| +% #2 is heading level
|
| +% #3 is text for heading
|
| +\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
|
| + % Compute the abs. sec. level:
|
| + \absseclevel=#2
|
| + \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
|
| + % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
|
| + \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
|
| + \absseclevel = 0
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
|
| + \absseclevel = 3
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + % The heading type:
|
| + \def\headtype{#1}%
|
| + \if \headtype U%
|
| + \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
|
| + \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else
|
| + % Check for appendix sections:
|
| + \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
|
| + \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
|
| + \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
|
| + \fi\fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
|
| + \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
|
| + \def\headtype{U}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \chardef\unmlevel = 3
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + % Now print the heading:
|
| + \if \headtype U%
|
| + \ifcase\absseclevel
|
| + \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
|
| + \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
|
| + \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
|
| + \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else
|
| + \if \headtype A%
|
| + \ifcase\absseclevel
|
| + \appendixzzz{#3}%
|
| + \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
|
| + \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
|
| + \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifcase\absseclevel
|
| + \chapterzzz{#3}%
|
| + \or \seczzz{#3}%
|
| + \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
|
| + \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \suppressfirstparagraphindent
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% an interface:
|
| +\def\numhead{\genhead N}
|
| +\def\apphead{\genhead A}
|
| +\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
|
| +
|
| +% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
|
| +% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
|
| +%
|
| +% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
|
| +% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
|
| +\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
|
| +%
|
| +\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
|
| +\def\chapterzzz#1{%
|
| + % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
|
| + % as an @include file.
|
| + \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
| + \global\advance\chapno by 1
|
| + %
|
| + % Used for \float.
|
| + \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
|
| + \resetallfloatnos
|
| + %
|
| + \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Write the actual heading.
|
| + \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
|
| + %
|
| + % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
|
| + \global\let\section = \numberedsec
|
| + \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
| + \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
|
| +\def\appendixzzz#1{%
|
| + \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
| + \global\advance\appendixno by 1
|
| + \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
|
| + \resetallfloatnos
|
| + %
|
| + \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
|
| + \message{\appendixnum}%
|
| + %
|
| + \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
|
| + %
|
| + \global\let\section = \appendixsec
|
| + \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
|
| + \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
|
| +\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
|
| + \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
|
| + \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
|
| + %
|
| + % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
|
| + \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
|
| + \resetallfloatnos
|
| + %
|
| + % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
|
| + % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
|
| + % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
|
| + % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
|
| + % to be executed, not expanded).
|
| + %
|
| + % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
|
| + % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
|
| + % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
|
| + % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
|
| + % the toc entries.)
|
| + \toks0 = {#1}%
|
| + \message{(\the\toks0)}%
|
| + %
|
| + \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
|
| + %
|
| + \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
|
| + \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
|
| + \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
|
| +\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
|
| + % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
|
| + % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
|
| + % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
|
| + \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
|
| + \unnmhead0{#1}%
|
| + \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @top is like @unnumbered.
|
| +\let\top\unnumbered
|
| +
|
| +% Sections.
|
| +\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
|
| +\def\seczzz#1{%
|
| + \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
| + \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
|
| +\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
|
| + \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
| + \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
|
| +}
|
| +\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
|
| +
|
| +\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
|
| +\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
|
| + \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
|
| + \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Subsections.
|
| +\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
|
| +\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
|
| + \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
| + \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
|
| +\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
|
| + \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
| + \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
|
| + {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
|
| +\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
|
| + \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
|
| + \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
|
| + {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Subsubsections.
|
| +\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
|
| +\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
| + \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
| + \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
|
| + {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
|
| +\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
| + \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
| + \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
|
| + {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
|
| +\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
|
| + \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
|
| + \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
|
| + {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% These macros control what the section commands do, according
|
| +% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
|
| +% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
|
| +\let\section = \numberedsec
|
| +\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
| +\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
| +
|
| +% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
|
| +
|
| +% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
|
| +% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
|
| +% overlong headings to fold.
|
| +% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
|
| +% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
|
| +% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
|
| +% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
|
| +
|
| +\def\majorheading{%
|
| + {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
|
| + \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
|
| +\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
|
| + {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
| + \parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
| + \rmisbold #1\hfill}}%
|
| + \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
|
| + \suppressfirstparagraphindent
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
|
| +\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
| + \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
| +\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
| + \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
| +\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
|
| + \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
|
| +
|
| +% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
|
| +% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
|
| +% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
|
| +
|
| +%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
|
| +\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
|
| +
|
| +%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
|
| +% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
|
| +
|
| +\newskip\chapheadingskip
|
| +
|
| +\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
|
| +\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
| +% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
|
| +% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
|
| +% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
|
| +\def\chapoddpage{%
|
| + \chappager
|
| + \ifodd\pageno \else
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
|
| + \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
|
| + \hbox to 0pt{}%
|
| + \chappager
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
|
| +
|
| +\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
|
| +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| +\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
|
| +\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
|
| +
|
| +\def\CHAPPAGon{%
|
| +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| +\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
|
| +\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
|
| +\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
|
| +
|
| +\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
|
| +\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
| +\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
|
| +\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
|
| +\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
|
| +
|
| +\CHAPPAGon
|
| +
|
| +% Chapter opening.
|
| +%
|
| +% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
|
| +% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
|
| +%
|
| +% To test against our argument.
|
| +\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
|
| +\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
|
| +\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
|
| + % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
|
| + \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
|
| + \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
|
| + \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
|
| + \gdef\thissection{}}%
|
| + %
|
| + \def\temptype{#2}%
|
| + \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
| + \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
|
| + \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
|
| + \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
| + \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
|
| + \gdef\thischapter{}}%
|
| + \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
| + \toks0={#1}%
|
| + \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
|
| + \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
|
| + \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
|
| + \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \noexpand\thischapternum:
|
| + \noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \else
|
| + \toks0={#1}%
|
| + \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
|
| + \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
|
| + \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
|
| + \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \noexpand\thischapternum:
|
| + \noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \fi\fi\fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
|
| + % the preceding space.
|
| + \safewhatsit\domark
|
| + %
|
| + % Insert the chapter heading break.
|
| + \pchapsepmacro
|
| + %
|
| + % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
|
| + % between here and the heading.
|
| + \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
|
| + \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
|
| + \domark
|
| + %
|
| + {%
|
| + \chapfonts \rmisbold
|
| + %
|
| + % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
|
| + % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
|
| + % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
|
| + \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
|
| + % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
|
| + \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
| + \def\toctype{unnchap}%
|
| + \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
|
| + \def\toctype{omit}%
|
| + \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
|
| + \def\toctype{app}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
|
| + \def\toctype{numchap}%
|
| + \fi\fi\fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
|
| + % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
|
| + % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
|
| + \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
|
| + %
|
| + % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
|
| + % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
|
| + % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
|
| + % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
|
| + % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
|
| + \donoderef{#2}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Typeset the actual heading.
|
| + \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
|
| + \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
|
| + \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
|
| + \unhbox0 #1\par}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
|
| + \nobreak
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
|
| +\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
| +\def\centerparameters{%
|
| + \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
|
| + \leftskip = \rightskip
|
| + \parfillskip = 0pt
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
|
| +% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\unnchfopen #1{%
|
| +\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
| + \parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
| + \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
| +}
|
| +\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
|
| +\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
|
| +\par\penalty 5000 %
|
| +}
|
| +\def\centerchfopen #1{%
|
| +\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
| + \parindent=0pt
|
| + \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
| +}
|
| +\def\CHAPFopen{%
|
| + \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
|
| + \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
|
| +% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
|
| +%
|
| +\newskip\secheadingskip
|
| +\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
|
| +
|
| +% Subsection titles.
|
| +\newskip\subsecheadingskip
|
| +\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
|
| +
|
| +% Subsubsection titles.
|
| +\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
|
| +\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% Print any size, any type, section title.
|
| +%
|
| +% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
|
| +% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
|
| +% section number.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\seckeyword{sec}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
|
| + {%
|
| + % Switch to the right set of fonts.
|
| + \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
|
| + %
|
| + \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
|
| + \def\temptype{#3}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
|
| + \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
|
| + \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
| + \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
|
| + \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
|
| + \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
| + % Don't redefine \thissection.
|
| + \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
| + \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
|
| + \toks0={#1}%
|
| + \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
|
| + \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
|
| + \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
|
| + \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum:
|
| + \noexpand\thissectionname}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
|
| + \toks0={#1}%
|
| + \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
|
| + \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
|
| + \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
|
| + \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum:
|
| + \noexpand\thissectionname}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi\fi\fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
|
| + % the preceding space.
|
| + \safewhatsit\domark
|
| + %
|
| + % Insert space above the heading.
|
| + \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
|
| + %
|
| + % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
|
| + % between here and the heading.
|
| + \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
|
| + \domark
|
| + %
|
| + % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
|
| + \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
| + \def\toctype{unn}%
|
| + \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
|
| + \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
|
| + % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
|
| + % and don't redefine \lastsection.
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
|
| + \def\toctype{omit}%
|
| + \let\sectionlevel=\empty
|
| + \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
|
| + \def\toctype{app}%
|
| + \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
|
| + \def\toctype{num}%
|
| + \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
|
| + \fi\fi\fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
|
| + \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
|
| + % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
|
| + \donoderef{#3}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
|
| + % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
|
| + % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
|
| + % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
|
| + % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
|
| + % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
|
| + \nobreak
|
| + %
|
| + % Output the actual section heading.
|
| + \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
|
| + \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
|
| + \unhbox0 #1}%
|
| + }%
|
| + % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
|
| + % Don't allow stretch, though.
|
| + \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
|
| + %
|
| + % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
|
| + % was followed by glue.
|
| + \nobreak
|
| + %
|
| + % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
|
| + % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
|
| + % discardable item.)
|
| + \vskip-\parskip
|
| + %
|
| + % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
|
| + % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
|
| + % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
|
| + %
|
| + % @section sec-whatever
|
| + % @deffn def-whatever
|
| + \penalty 10001
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{toc,}
|
| +% Table of contents.
|
| +\newwrite\tocfile
|
| +
|
| +% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
|
| +% Called from @chapter, etc.
|
| +%
|
| +% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
|
| +% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
|
| +% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
|
| +% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
|
| +% destination to jump to.
|
| +%
|
| +% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
|
| +% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
|
| +% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
|
| +% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
|
| +%
|
| +\newif\iftocfileopened
|
| +\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
|
| +%
|
| +\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
|
| + \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
|
| + \iftocfileopened\else
|
| + \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
|
| + \global\tocfileopenedtrue
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + \iflinks
|
| + {\atdummies
|
| + \edef\temp{%
|
| + \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
|
| + \temp
|
| + }%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
|
| + % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
|
| + % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
|
| + % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
|
| + % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
|
| + % `1', and two named `2'.
|
| + \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
|
| +% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
|
| +% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\activecatcodes{%
|
| + \catcode`\"=\active
|
| + \catcode`\$=\active
|
| + \catcode`\<=\active
|
| + \catcode`\>=\active
|
| + \catcode`\\=\active
|
| + \catcode`\^=\active
|
| + \catcode`\_=\active
|
| + \catcode`\|=\active
|
| + \catcode`\~=\active
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
|
| +\def\readtocfile{%
|
| + \setupdatafile
|
| + \activecatcodes
|
| + \input \tocreadfilename
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
|
| +\newcount\savepageno
|
| +\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
|
| +
|
| +% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\startcontents#1{%
|
| + % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
|
| + % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
|
| + % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
|
| + % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
|
| + \contentsalignmacro
|
| + \immediate\closeout\tocfile
|
| + %
|
| + % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
|
| + % It is abundantly clear what they are.
|
| + \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
|
| + %
|
| + \savepageno = \pageno
|
| + \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
|
| + \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
|
| + \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
|
| + %
|
| + % Roman numerals for page numbers.
|
| + \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
|
| +% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
|
| +
|
| +% Normal (long) toc.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\contents{%
|
| + \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
|
| + \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
|
| + \ifeof 1 \else
|
| + \readtocfile
|
| + \fi
|
| + \vfill \eject
|
| + \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
| + \ifeof 1 \else
|
| + \pdfmakeoutlines
|
| + \fi
|
| + \closein 1
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
| + \global\pageno = \savepageno
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% And just the chapters.
|
| +\def\summarycontents{%
|
| + \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
|
| + %
|
| + \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
|
| + \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
|
| + \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
|
| + % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
|
| + \secfonts
|
| + \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
|
| + \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
|
| + \rm
|
| + \hyphenpenalty = 10000
|
| + \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
|
| + \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
|
| + \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| + \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| + \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| + \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| + \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| + \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| + \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| + \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
|
| + \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
|
| + \ifeof 1 \else
|
| + \readtocfile
|
| + \fi
|
| + \closein 1
|
| + \vfill \eject
|
| + \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
| + \global\pageno = \savepageno
|
| +}
|
| +\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
|
| +
|
| +% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
|
| +% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
|
| + % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
|
| + % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
|
| + % But use \hss just in case.
|
| + % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
|
| + % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
|
| + %
|
| + % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
|
| + % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
|
| + % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
|
| + % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
|
| + % there are before deciding ...
|
| + \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
|
| +% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
|
| +% The last argument is the page number.
|
| +% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
|
| +
|
| +% Chapters, in the main contents.
|
| +\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
| +%
|
| +% Chapters, in the short toc.
|
| +% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
|
| +\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
|
| + \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Appendices, in the main contents.
|
| +% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\appendixbox#1{%
|
| + % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
|
| + \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
| +
|
| +% Unnumbered chapters.
|
| +\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
|
| +\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
|
| +
|
| +% Sections.
|
| +\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
| +\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
|
| +\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
| +
|
| +% Subsections.
|
| +\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
| +\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
|
| +\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
| +
|
| +% And subsubsections.
|
| +\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
| +\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
|
| +\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
| +
|
| +% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
|
| +% Same as \defaultparindent.
|
| +\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
|
| +
|
| +% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
|
| +% page number.
|
| +%
|
| +% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
|
| +% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
|
| +\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
|
| + \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \chapentryfonts
|
| + \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
| + \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
|
| + \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
| +\endgroup}
|
| +
|
| +\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
| + \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
|
| + \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
| +\endgroup}
|
| +
|
| +\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
| + \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
|
| + \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
| +\endgroup}
|
| +
|
| +% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
|
| +\let\tocentry = \entry
|
| +
|
| +% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
|
| +\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
|
| +
|
| +\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
| +\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
| +
|
| +\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
|
| +\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
| +\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
| +\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{environments,}
|
| +% @foo ... @end foo.
|
| +
|
| +% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
|
| +% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
|
| +% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
|
| +
|
| +\envdef\tex{%
|
| + \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
|
| + \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
|
| + \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
|
| + \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
|
| + \catcode `\%=14
|
| + \catcode `\+=\other
|
| + \catcode `\"=\other
|
| + \catcode `\|=\other
|
| + \catcode `\<=\other
|
| + \catcode `\>=\other
|
| + \catcode`\`=\other
|
| + \catcode`\'=\other
|
| + \escapechar=`\\
|
| + %
|
| + \let\b=\ptexb
|
| + \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
|
| + \let\c=\ptexc
|
| + \let\,=\ptexcomma
|
| + \let\.=\ptexdot
|
| + \let\dots=\ptexdots
|
| + \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
|
| + \let\!=\ptexexclam
|
| + \let\i=\ptexi
|
| + \let\indent=\ptexindent
|
| + \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
|
| + \let\{=\ptexlbrace
|
| + \let\+=\tabalign
|
| + \let\}=\ptexrbrace
|
| + \let\/=\ptexslash
|
| + \let\*=\ptexstar
|
| + \let\t=\ptext
|
| + \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer
|
| + \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
|
| + %
|
| + \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
|
| + \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
|
| + \def\@{@}%
|
| +}
|
| +% There is no need to define \Etex.
|
| +
|
| +% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
|
| +% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
|
| +% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
|
| +
|
| +% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
|
| +\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
|
| +
|
| +% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
|
| +% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
|
| +% have any width.
|
| +\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
|
| +
|
| +% This space is always present above and below environments.
|
| +\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
|
| +
|
| +% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
|
| +% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
|
| +% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
|
| +% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
|
| + % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
|
| + % \sectionheading, q.v.
|
| + \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
|
| + \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
|
| + \endgraf
|
| + \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
|
| + \removelastskip
|
| + % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
|
| + % or better ...
|
| + \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
|
| + \vskip\envskipamount
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| +}}
|
| +
|
| +\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
|
| +
|
| +% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
|
| +% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
|
| +\let\nonarrowing=\relax
|
| +
|
| +% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
|
| +% environment contents.
|
| +\font\circle=lcircle10
|
| +\newdimen\circthick
|
| +\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
|
| +\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
|
| +\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
|
| +%
|
| +\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
|
| +\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
|
| +\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
|
| +\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
|
| +\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
| + \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
|
| + \hskip\rskip}}
|
| +\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
| + \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
|
| + \hskip\rskip}}
|
| +%
|
| +\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
|
| +
|
| +\envdef\cartouche{%
|
| + \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
|
| + \startsavinginserts
|
| + \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
|
| + \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
|
| + \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
|
| + \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
|
| + \cartouter=\hsize
|
| + \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
|
| + % side, and for 6pt waste from
|
| + % each corner char, and rule thickness
|
| + \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
|
| + % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
|
| + \let\nonarrowing = t%
|
| + \vbox\bgroup
|
| + \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
|
| + \carttop
|
| + \hbox\bgroup
|
| + \hskip\lskip
|
| + \vrule\kern3pt
|
| + \vbox\bgroup
|
| + \kern3pt
|
| + \hsize=\cartinner
|
| + \baselineskip=\normbskip
|
| + \lineskip=\normlskip
|
| + \parskip=\normpskip
|
| + \vskip -\parskip
|
| + \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
|
| +}
|
| +\def\Ecartouche{%
|
| + \ifhmode\par\fi
|
| + \kern3pt
|
| + \egroup
|
| + \kern3pt\vrule
|
| + \hskip\rskip
|
| + \egroup
|
| + \cartbot
|
| + \egroup
|
| + \checkinserts
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
|
| +% inside a group.
|
| +\def\nonfillstart{%
|
| + \aboveenvbreak
|
| + \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
|
| + \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
|
| + \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
|
| + \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
|
| + \parskip = 0pt
|
| + \parindent = 0pt
|
| + \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
|
| + \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
| + \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
| + \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
|
| + \else
|
| + \let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
| + \fi
|
| + \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
|
| +% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
|
| +% This affects the following displayed environments:
|
| +% @example, @display, @format, @lisp
|
| +%
|
| +\def\smallword{small}
|
| +\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
|
| +\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
|
| +\def\setnormaldispenv{%
|
| + \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
|
| + % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
|
| + % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
|
| + % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
|
| + % to change the fonts afterward.
|
| + \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
|
| + \smallexamplefonts \rm
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +\def\setsmalldispenv{%
|
| + \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
|
| + \smallexamplefonts \rm
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
|
| +% Let's do it by one command:
|
| +\def\makedispenv #1#2{
|
| + \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
|
| + \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
|
| + \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
|
| + \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Define two synonyms:
|
| +\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
|
| + \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
|
| + \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
|
| +%
|
| +% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
|
| +% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
|
| +%
|
| +\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
|
| + \nonfillstart
|
| + \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
|
| + \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
|
| + \gobble % eat return
|
| +}
|
| +% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
|
| +%
|
| +\makedispenv {display}{%
|
| + \nonfillstart
|
| + \gobble
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
|
| +%
|
| +\makedispenv{format}{%
|
| + \let\nonarrowing = t%
|
| + \nonfillstart
|
| + \gobble
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
|
| +\envdef\flushleft{%
|
| + \let\nonarrowing = t%
|
| + \nonfillstart
|
| + \gobble
|
| +}
|
| +\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
|
| +
|
| +% @flushright.
|
| +%
|
| +\envdef\flushright{%
|
| + \let\nonarrowing = t%
|
| + \nonfillstart
|
| + \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
|
| + \gobble
|
| +}
|
| +\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
|
| +% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
|
| +% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
|
| +% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\quotationstart{%
|
| + {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
|
| + \parindent=0pt
|
| + %
|
| + % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
|
| + \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
| + \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
| + \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
|
| + \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
|
| + \else
|
| + \let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
| + \fi
|
| + \parsearg\quotationlabel
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\envdef\quotation{%
|
| + \setnormaldispenv
|
| + \quotationstart
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\envdef\smallquotation{%
|
| + \setsmalldispenv
|
| + \quotationstart
|
| +}
|
| +\let\Esmallquotation = \Equotation
|
| +
|
| +% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
|
| +% doing normal filling.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\Equotation{%
|
| + \par
|
| + \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
|
| + % indent a bit.
|
| + \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
|
| +\def\quotationlabel#1{%
|
| + \def\temp{#1}%
|
| + \ifx\temp\empty \else
|
| + {\bf #1: }%
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
|
| +% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
|
| +% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
|
| +% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
|
| +%
|
| +% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
|
| +%
|
| +% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
|
| +% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
|
| +% verbatim line.
|
| +\def\dospecials{%
|
| + \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
|
| + \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
|
| + \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
|
| + % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
|
| + % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
|
| + % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
|
| + %\do\`\do\'%
|
| +}
|
| +%
|
| +% [Knuth] p. 380
|
| +\def\uncatcodespecials{%
|
| + \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
|
| +%
|
| +% Setup for the @verb command.
|
| +%
|
| +% Eight spaces for a tab
|
| +\begingroup
|
| + \catcode`\^^I=\active
|
| + \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
|
| +\endgroup
|
| +%
|
| +\def\setupverb{%
|
| + \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
|
| + \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
|
| + \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
|
| + \tabeightspaces
|
| + % Respect line breaks,
|
| + % print special symbols as themselves, and
|
| + % make each space count
|
| + % must do in this order:
|
| + \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Setup for the @verbatim environment
|
| +%
|
| +% Real tab expansion
|
| +\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
|
| +%
|
| +\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
|
| +%
|
| +\begingroup
|
| + \catcode`\^^I=\active
|
| + \gdef\tabexpand{%
|
| + \catcode`\^^I=\active
|
| + \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
|
| + \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
|
| + \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
|
| + \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
|
| + \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
|
| + \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
|
| + }%
|
| + }
|
| +\endgroup
|
| +
|
| +% start the verbatim environment.
|
| +\def\setupverbatim{%
|
| + \let\nonarrowing = t%
|
| + \nonfillstart
|
| + % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
|
| + \tt
|
| + \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
|
| + \tabexpand
|
| + \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
|
| + % Respect line breaks,
|
| + % print special symbols as themselves, and
|
| + % make each space count
|
| + % must do in this order:
|
| + \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
|
| + \everypar{\starttabbox}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
|
| +% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
|
| +% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
|
| +%
|
| +% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
|
| +%
|
| +% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
|
| +\begingroup
|
| + \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
|
| + \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
|
| +\endgroup
|
| +%
|
| +\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
|
| +%
|
| +%
|
| +% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
|
| +% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
|
| +%
|
| +% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
|
| +%
|
| +% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
|
| +% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
|
| +% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
|
| +%
|
| +% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
|
| +%
|
| +\begingroup
|
| + \catcode`\ =\active
|
| + \obeylines %
|
| + % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
|
| + % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
|
| + % line in the output.
|
| + \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
|
| + % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
|
| + % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
|
| +\endgroup
|
| +%
|
| +\envdef\verbatim{%
|
| + \setupverbatim\doverbatim
|
| +}
|
| +\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
|
| + {%
|
| + \makevalueexpandable
|
| + \setupverbatim
|
| + \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
|
| + \input #1
|
| + \afterenvbreak
|
| + }%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @copying ... @end copying.
|
| +% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
|
| +%
|
| +% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
|
| +% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
|
| +% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
|
| +% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
|
| +% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
|
| +% possible is very desirable.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
|
| +\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\insertcopying{%
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
|
| + \scanexp\copyingtext
|
| + \endgroup
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{defuns,}
|
| +% @defun etc.
|
| +
|
| +\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
|
| +\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
|
| +\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
|
| +\newcount\defunpenalty
|
| +
|
| +% Start the processing of @deffn:
|
| +\def\startdefun{%
|
| + \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
|
| + \medbreak
|
| + \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
|
| + % following @def command, see below.
|
| + \else
|
| + % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
|
| + % which is there to keep the function description together with its
|
| + % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
|
| + % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
|
| + % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
|
| + % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
|
| + % a break between a section heading and a defun.
|
| + %
|
| + % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
|
| + % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
|
| + % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
|
| + % @def command.
|
| + \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
|
| + % But do insert the glue.
|
| + \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + \parindent=0in
|
| + \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
| + \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\dodefunx#1{%
|
| + % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
|
| + \checkenv#1%
|
| + %
|
| + % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
|
| + % It's not a great place, though.
|
| + \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
|
| + \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
|
| +}
|
| +\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
|
| +
|
| +% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + % call \deffnheader:
|
| + #1#2 \endheader
|
| + % common ending:
|
| + \interlinepenalty = 10000
|
| + \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
|
| + \endgraf
|
| + \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
|
| + \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
|
| + % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
|
| + % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
|
| + \checkparencounts
|
| + \endgroup
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
|
| +
|
| +% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
|
| +% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\makedefun#1{%
|
| + \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
|
| + \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
|
| + \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
|
| + \temp
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
|
| +%
|
| +% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
|
| +% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
|
| + \envdef#1{%
|
| + \startdefun
|
| + \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
|
| + \def#3%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +%%% Untyped functions:
|
| +
|
| +% @deffn category name args
|
| +\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
|
| +
|
| +% @deffn category class name args
|
| +\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
|
| +
|
| +% \defopon {category on}class name args
|
| +\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
| +
|
| +% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
|
| +%
|
| +\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
|
| + % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
|
| + \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
|
| + \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +%%% Typed functions:
|
| +
|
| +% @deftypefn category type name args
|
| +\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
|
| +
|
| +% @deftypeop category class type name args
|
| +\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
|
| +
|
| +% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
|
| +\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
| +
|
| +% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
|
| +%
|
| +\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
|
| + \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
|
| + \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +%%% Typed variables:
|
| +
|
| +% @deftypevr category type var args
|
| +\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
|
| +
|
| +% @deftypecv category class type var args
|
| +\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
|
| +
|
| +% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
|
| +\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
|
| +
|
| +% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
|
| +%
|
| +\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
|
| + \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
|
| + \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +%%% Untyped variables:
|
| +
|
| +% @defvr category var args
|
| +\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
|
| +
|
| +% @defcv category class var args
|
| +\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
|
| +
|
| +% \defcvof {category of}class var args
|
| +\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
|
| +
|
| +%%% Type:
|
| +% @deftp category name args
|
| +\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
|
| + \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
|
| + \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
|
| +\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
|
| +\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
|
| +\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
|
| +\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
|
| +\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
|
| +\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
|
| +\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
|
| +\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
|
| +\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
|
| +\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
|
| +\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
|
| +
|
| +% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
|
| +% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
|
| +% #2 is the return type, if any.
|
| +% #3 is the function name.
|
| +%
|
| +% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\defname#1#2#3{%
|
| + % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
|
| + \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
|
| + %
|
| + % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps
|
| + % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
|
| + % just below it.
|
| + \def\temp{#1}%
|
| + \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
|
| + %
|
| + % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
|
| + % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
|
| + % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
|
| + \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
|
| + % The continuations:
|
| + \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
|
| + % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
|
| + \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
|
| + %
|
| + % Put the type name to the right margin.
|
| + \noindent
|
| + \hbox to 0pt{%
|
| + \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
|
| + % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
|
| + \kern\leftskip
|
| + % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
|
| + }%
|
| + %
|
| + % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
|
| + \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
|
| + \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
| + {%
|
| + % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
|
| + % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
|
| + % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
|
| + % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
|
| + % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
|
| + % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
|
| + % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
|
| + % one has made identifiers using them :).
|
| + \df \tt
|
| + \def\temp{#2}% return value type
|
| + \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
|
| + #3% output function name
|
| + }%
|
| + {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
|
| + %
|
| + \boldbrax
|
| + % arguments will be output next, if any.
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
|
| +% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
|
| +% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
|
| +% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\defunargs#1{%
|
| + % use sl by default (not ttsl),
|
| + % tt for the names.
|
| + \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
|
| + %
|
| + % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
|
| + % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that.
|
| + \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
|
| + #1%
|
| + \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\activeparens{%
|
| + \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
|
| + \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
|
| + \catcode`\&=\active
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
|
| +\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
|
| +
|
| +% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
|
| +% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
|
| +% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
|
| +{
|
| + \activeparens
|
| + \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
|
| + \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
|
| + \global\let& = \&
|
| +
|
| + \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
|
| + \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\newcount\parencount
|
| +
|
| +% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
|
| +\newif\ifampseen
|
| +\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
|
| +
|
| +\def\parenfont{%
|
| + \ifampseen
|
| + % At the first level, print parens in roman,
|
| + % otherwise use the default font.
|
| + \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
|
| + \else
|
| + % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
|
| + % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
|
| + \sf
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +\def\infirstlevel#1{%
|
| + \ifampseen
|
| + \ifnum\parencount=1
|
| + #1%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
|
| +
|
| +\def\opnr{%
|
| + \global\advance\parencount by 1
|
| + {\parenfont(}%
|
| + \infirstlevel \bfafterword
|
| +}
|
| +\def\clnr{%
|
| + {\parenfont)}%
|
| + \infirstlevel \sl
|
| + \global\advance\parencount by -1
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\newcount\brackcount
|
| +\def\lbrb{%
|
| + \global\advance\brackcount by 1
|
| + {\bf[}%
|
| +}
|
| +\def\rbrb{%
|
| + {\bf]}%
|
| + \global\advance\brackcount by -1
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\checkparencounts{%
|
| + \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
|
| + \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
|
| +}
|
| +% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
|
| +% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
|
| +\def\badparencount{%
|
| + \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
|
| + \global\parencount=0
|
| +}
|
| +\def\badbrackcount{%
|
| + \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
|
| + \global\brackcount=0
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{macros,}
|
| +% @macro.
|
| +
|
| +% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
|
| +% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
|
| +\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
|
| + \newwrite\macscribble
|
| + \def\scantokens#1{%
|
| + \toks0={#1}%
|
| + \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
|
| + \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
|
| + \immediate\closeout\macscribble
|
| + \input \jobname.tmp
|
| + }
|
| +\fi
|
| +
|
| +\def\scanmacro#1{%
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \newlinechar`\^^M
|
| + \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
|
| + % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
|
| + % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
|
| + % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
|
| + % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
|
| + % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
|
| + \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
|
| + % ... and \example
|
| + \spaceisspace
|
| + %
|
| + % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
|
| + % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
|
| + % --kasal, 29nov03
|
| + \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
|
| + \endgroup
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\scanexp#1{%
|
| + \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
|
| + \temp
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
|
| +\newtoks\macname % Macro name
|
| +\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
|
| +
|
| +% List of all defined macros in the form
|
| +% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
|
| +% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
|
| +% if there is a need.
|
| +\def\macrolist{}
|
| +
|
| +% Add the macro to \macrolist
|
| +\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
|
| +\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
|
| + \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
|
| + \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Utility routines.
|
| +% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
|
| +% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
|
| +% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
|
| +%
|
| +\def\cslet#1#2{%
|
| + \expandafter\let
|
| + \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
|
| + \csname#2\endcsname
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
|
| +% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
|
| +{\catcode`\@=11
|
| +\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
|
| +\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
|
| +\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
|
| +\def\unbrace#1{#1}
|
| +\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
|
| +{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
|
| +\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
|
| +\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
|
| +\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
|
| +% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
|
| +% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
|
| +
|
| +% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
|
| +% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
|
| +% confine the change to the current group.
|
| +
|
| +% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
|
| +% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
|
| +% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
|
| +
|
| +\def\scanctxt{%
|
| + \catcode`\"=\other
|
| + \catcode`\+=\other
|
| + \catcode`\<=\other
|
| + \catcode`\>=\other
|
| + \catcode`\@=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^=\other
|
| + \catcode`\_=\other
|
| + \catcode`\|=\other
|
| + \catcode`\~=\other
|
| + \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\scanargctxt{%
|
| + \scanctxt
|
| + \catcode`\\=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^M=\other
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\macrobodyctxt{%
|
| + \scanctxt
|
| + \catcode`\{=\other
|
| + \catcode`\}=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^M=\other
|
| + \usembodybackslash
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\macroargctxt{%
|
| + \scanctxt
|
| + \catcode`\\=\other
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
|
| +% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
|
| +% where N is the macro parameter number.
|
| +% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
|
| +% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
|
| +
|
| +{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
|
| + @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
|
| + @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
|
| +}
|
| +\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
|
| +
|
| +\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
| +\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
| +
|
| +\def\macroxxx#1{%
|
| + \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
|
| + \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
|
| + \paramno=0%
|
| + \else
|
| + \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
|
| + \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
|
| + \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
|
| + \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
|
| + \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
|
| + \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
|
| + \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
|
| + \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
|
| + \fi}
|
| +
|
| +\parseargdef\unmacro{%
|
| + \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
|
| + \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
|
| + \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
|
| + % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
|
| + \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
|
| + \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + \else
|
| + \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
|
| +% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\unmacrodo#1{%
|
| + \ifx #1\relax
|
| + % remove this
|
| + \else
|
| + \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
|
| +% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
|
| +% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
|
| +\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
|
| +\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
|
| +\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
|
| +\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
|
| +
|
| +% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
|
| +% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
|
| +% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
|
| +% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
|
| +
|
| +% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
|
| +% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
|
| +% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
|
| +% it to # just before using the token list produced.
|
| +%
|
| +% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
|
| +% the macro is used.
|
| +
|
| +\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
|
| + \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
|
| +\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
|
| + \if#1;\let\next=\relax
|
| + \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
|
| + \advance\paramno by 1%
|
| + \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
|
| + {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
|
| + \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
|
| + \fi\next}
|
| +
|
| +% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
|
| +% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
|
| +
|
| +\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
|
| +{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
| +\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
|
| +{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
| +
|
| +% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
|
| +% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
|
| +% Much magic with \expandafter here.
|
| +% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
|
| +% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
|
| +\def\defmacro{%
|
| + \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
|
| + \ifrecursive
|
| + \ifcase\paramno
|
| + % 0
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| + \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
| + \or % 1
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| + \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
| + \noexpand\braceorline
|
| + \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
| + \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
| + \else % many
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| + \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
| + \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
| + \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
| + \expandafter\expandafter
|
| + \expandafter\xdef
|
| + \expandafter\expandafter
|
| + \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
| + \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifcase\paramno
|
| + % 0
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| + \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
| + \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
| + \or % 1
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| + \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
| + \noexpand\braceorline
|
| + \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
| + \egroup
|
| + \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
| + \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
| + \else % many
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| + \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
| + \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
| + \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
| + \expandafter\expandafter
|
| + \expandafter\xdef
|
| + \expandafter\expandafter
|
| + \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
| + \paramlist{%
|
| + \egroup
|
| + \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
| + \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi}
|
| +
|
| +\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
|
| +
|
| +% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
|
| +% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
|
| +% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
|
| +% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
|
| +\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
|
| +\def\braceorlinexxx{%
|
| + \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
|
| + \expandafter\parsearg
|
| + \fi \macnamexxx}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% @alias.
|
| +% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
|
| +% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
|
| +\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
|
| +\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
|
| +\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
|
| + {%
|
| + \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
|
| + \addtomacrolist{#1}%
|
| + \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \next
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{cross references,}
|
| +
|
| +\newwrite\auxfile
|
| +\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
|
| +\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
|
| +
|
| +% @inforef is relatively simple.
|
| +\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
|
| +\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
|
| + node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
|
| +
|
| +% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
|
| +% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
|
| +% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
|
| +% @node foo , bar , ...
|
| +% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
|
| +%
|
| +% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
|
| +% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
|
| +\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
|
| +\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
|
| +
|
| +\let\nwnode=\node
|
| +\let\lastnode=\empty
|
| +
|
| +% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
|
| +% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
|
| +%
|
| +\def\donoderef#1{%
|
| + \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
|
| + \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
|
| + \global\let\lastnode=\empty
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
|
| +%
|
| +\newcount\savesfregister
|
| +%
|
| +\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
|
| +\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
|
| +\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
|
| +
|
| +% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
|
| +% anchor), which consists of three parts:
|
| +% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
|
| +% or the anchor name.
|
| +% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
|
| +% empty for anchors.
|
| +% 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
|
| +%
|
| +% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
|
| +% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
|
| +% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\setref#1#2{%
|
| + \pdfmkdest{#1}%
|
| + \iflinks
|
| + {%
|
| + \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
|
| + \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
|
| + \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
|
| + ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
|
| + }%
|
| + \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
|
| + \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
|
| + \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
|
| + \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout
|
| + }%
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
|
| +% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
|
| +% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
|
| +% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
| +\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
| +\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
| +\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
|
| + \unsepspaces
|
| + \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
|
| + \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
| + \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
|
| + \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
|
| + \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
|
| + % No printed node name was explicitly given.
|
| + \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
|
| + % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
|
| + \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
| + \else
|
| + % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
|
| + % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
|
| + \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
| + % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
|
| + \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifhavexrefs
|
| + % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
|
| + \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
|
| + \else
|
| + % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
|
| + \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
| + \fi%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Make link in pdf output.
|
| + \ifpdf
|
| + {\indexnofonts
|
| + \turnoffactive
|
| + % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
|
| + % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.
|
| + \getfilename{#4}%
|
| + %
|
| + % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
|
| + {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
|
| + \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
|
| + %
|
| + \leavevmode
|
| + \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
| + \ifnum\filenamelength>0
|
| + goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
|
| + \else
|
| + goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + }%
|
| + \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
|
| + % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
|
| + % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
|
| + {%
|
| + % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
|
| + % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
|
| + \indexnofonts
|
| + \turnoffactive
|
| + \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
|
| + \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
|
| + }%
|
| + \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
|
| + % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
|
| + % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
|
| + \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
|
| + \refx{#1-snt}{}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \printedrefname
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
|
| + % "in MANUALNAME".
|
| + \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
| + \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else
|
| + % node/anchor (non-float) references.
|
| + %
|
| + % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
|
| + % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
|
| + % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
|
| + % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
|
| + % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
|
| + % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
|
| + \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
| + \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
|
| + \else
|
| + % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
|
| + % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
|
| + % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
|
| + % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
|
| + % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
|
| + {\turnoffactive
|
| + % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
|
| + % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
|
| + \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
|
| + \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
|
| + }%
|
| + % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
|
| + \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
|
| + %
|
| + % But we always want a comma and a space:
|
| + ,\space
|
| + %
|
| + % output the `page 3'.
|
| + \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \endlink
|
| +\endgroup}
|
| +
|
| +% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
|
| +% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
|
| +% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
|
| +% one that Bob is working on :).
|
| +%
|
| +\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
|
| +
|
| +% Things referred to by \setref.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\Ynothing{}
|
| +\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
|
| +\def\Ynumbered{%
|
| + \ifnum\secno=0
|
| + \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
|
| + \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
|
| + \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
|
| + \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
|
| + \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
|
| + \else
|
| + \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
|
| + \fi\fi\fi
|
| +}
|
| +\def\Yappendix{%
|
| + \ifnum\secno=0
|
| + \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
|
| + \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
|
| + \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
|
| + \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
|
| + \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
|
| + \else
|
| + \putwordSection@tie
|
| + @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
|
| + \fi\fi\fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
|
| +% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\refx#1#2{%
|
| + {%
|
| + \indexnofonts
|
| + \otherbackslash
|
| + \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
|
| + \csname XR#1\endcsname
|
| + }%
|
| + \ifx\thisrefX\relax
|
| + % If not defined, say something at least.
|
| + \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
|
| + \iflinks
|
| + \ifhavexrefs
|
| + \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \ifwarnedxrefs\else
|
| + \global\warnedxrefstrue
|
| + \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else
|
| + % It's defined, so just use it.
|
| + \thisrefX
|
| + \fi
|
| + #2% Output the suffix in any case.
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
|
| +% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
|
| +% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\xrdef#1#2{%
|
| + {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
|
| + % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these
|
| + % mess up the control sequence name.
|
| + \indexnofonts
|
| + \turnoffactive
|
| + \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
|
| + }%
|
| + %
|
| + \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
|
| + %
|
| + % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
|
| + \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
|
| + % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
|
| + \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
|
| + \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
|
| + %
|
| + % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
|
| + \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
|
| + \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
|
| + \else
|
| + % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
|
| + \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
|
| + % for later use in \listoffloats.
|
| + \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
|
| + {\safexrefname}}%
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\tryauxfile{%
|
| + \openin 1 \jobname.aux
|
| + \ifeof 1 \else
|
| + \readdatafile{aux}%
|
| + \global\havexrefstrue
|
| + \fi
|
| + \closein 1
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\setupdatafile{%
|
| + \catcode`\^^@=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^A=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^B=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^C=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^D=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^E=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^F=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^G=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^H=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^K=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^L=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^N=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^P=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^Q=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^R=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^S=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^T=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^U=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^V=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^W=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^X=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^Z=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^[=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^\=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^]=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^^=\other
|
| + \catcode`\^^_=\other
|
| + % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
|
| + % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
|
| + % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
|
| + % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
|
| + % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
|
| + % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
|
| + % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
|
| + % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
|
| + %
|
| + % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
|
| + % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
|
| + % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
|
| + %
|
| + \catcode`\^=\other
|
| + %
|
| + % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
|
| + \catcode`\~=\other
|
| + \catcode`\[=\other
|
| + \catcode`\]=\other
|
| + \catcode`\"=\other
|
| + \catcode`\_=\other
|
| + \catcode`\|=\other
|
| + \catcode`\<=\other
|
| + \catcode`\>=\other
|
| + \catcode`\$=\other
|
| + \catcode`\#=\other
|
| + \catcode`\&=\other
|
| + \catcode`\%=\other
|
| + \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
|
| + %
|
| + % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
|
| + % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
|
| + % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
|
| + % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
|
| + % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
|
| + % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
|
| + % now. --karl, 15jan04.
|
| + \catcode`\\=\other
|
| + %
|
| + % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
|
| + {%
|
| + \count1=128
|
| + \def\loop{%
|
| + \catcode\count1=\other
|
| + \advance\count1 by 1
|
| + \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
|
| + }%
|
| + }%
|
| + %
|
| + % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
|
| + \catcode`\{=1
|
| + \catcode`\}=2
|
| + \catcode`\@=0
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\readdatafile#1{%
|
| +\begingroup
|
| + \setupdatafile
|
| + \input\jobname.#1
|
| +\endgroup}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{insertions,}
|
| +% including footnotes.
|
| +
|
| +\newcount \footnoteno
|
| +
|
| +% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
|
| +% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
|
| +% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
|
| +% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
|
| +% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
|
| +\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
|
| +
|
| +% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
|
| +\let\footnotestyle=\comment
|
| +
|
| +{\catcode `\@=11
|
| +%
|
| +% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
|
| +\gdef\footnote{%
|
| + \let\indent=\ptexindent
|
| + \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
|
| + \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
|
| + \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
|
| + %
|
| + % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
|
| + % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
|
| + \let\@sf\empty
|
| + \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
|
| + \unskip
|
| + \thisfootno\@sf
|
| + \dofootnote
|
| +}%
|
| +
|
| +% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
|
| +% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
|
| +%
|
| +% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
|
| +% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
|
| +% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
|
| +%
|
| +\gdef\dofootnote{%
|
| + \insert\footins\bgroup
|
| + % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
|
| + % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
|
| + % So reset some parameters.
|
| + \hsize=\pagewidth
|
| + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
|
| + \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
|
| + \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
|
| + \floatingpenalty\@MM
|
| + \leftskip\z@skip
|
| + \rightskip\z@skip
|
| + \spaceskip\z@skip
|
| + \xspaceskip\z@skip
|
| + \parindent\defaultparindent
|
| + %
|
| + \smallfonts \rm
|
| + %
|
| + % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
|
| + % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
|
| + % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
|
| + % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
|
| + \let\noindent = \relax
|
| + %
|
| + % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
|
| + % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
|
| + \everypar = {\hang}%
|
| + \textindent{\thisfootno}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
|
| + % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
|
| + % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
|
| + \footstrut
|
| + \futurelet\next\fo@t
|
| +}
|
| +}%end \catcode `\@=11
|
| +
|
| +% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
|
| +% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
|
| +% would be lost.
|
| +% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
|
| +% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
|
| +% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
|
| +
|
| +% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
|
| +% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
|
| +% out prematurely.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\startsavinginserts{%
|
| + \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
|
| + \let\insert\saveinsert
|
| + \else
|
| + \let\checkinserts\relax
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
|
| +% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\saveinsert#1{%
|
| + \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
|
| + \afterassignment\next
|
| + % swallow the left brace
|
| + \let\temp =
|
| +}
|
| +\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
|
| +\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
|
| +
|
| +\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
|
| +
|
| +\def\placesaveins#1{%
|
| + \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
|
| + {\box#1}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
|
| +{
|
| + \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
|
| + \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% initialization:
|
| +\def\newsaveins #1{%
|
| + \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
|
| + \next
|
| +}
|
| +\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
|
| + \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
|
| + \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
|
| + \checksaveins #1}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% initialize:
|
| +\let\checkinserts\empty
|
| +\newsaveins\footins
|
| +\newsaveins\margin
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
|
| +% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
|
| +%
|
| +% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
|
| +% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
|
| +% undone and the next image would fail.
|
| +\openin 1 = epsf.tex
|
| +\ifeof 1 \else
|
| + % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
|
| + % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
|
| + \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
|
| + \input epsf.tex
|
| +\fi
|
| +\closein 1
|
| +%
|
| +% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
|
| +\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
|
| +\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
|
| + work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
|
| + it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
|
| +%
|
| +\def\image#1{%
|
| + \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
|
| + \ifwarnednoepsf \else
|
| + \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
|
| + \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
|
| + \global\warnednoepsftrue
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else
|
| + \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +%
|
| +% Arguments to @image:
|
| +% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
|
| +% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
|
| +% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
|
| +% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
|
| +% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
|
| +\newif\ifimagevmode
|
| +\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
|
| + \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
|
| + \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
|
| + % If the image is by itself, center it.
|
| + \ifvmode
|
| + \imagevmodetrue
|
| + \nobreak\medskip
|
| + % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
|
| + % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
|
| + % above and below.
|
| + \nobreak\vskip\parskip
|
| + \nobreak
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
|
| + % environment such as @quotation is respected. On the other hand, if
|
| + % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation.
|
| + \noindent
|
| + %
|
| + % Output the image.
|
| + \ifpdf
|
| + \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
| + \else
|
| + % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
|
| + \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi % space after the standalone image
|
| +\endgroup}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
|
| +% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
|
| +% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
|
| +%
|
| +\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
|
| +
|
| +% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
|
| +\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
|
| +
|
| +% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
|
| +% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
|
| +% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
|
| +%
|
| +% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
|
| +% be referable.
|
| +%
|
| +% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
|
| +% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
|
| +%
|
| +% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
|
| +% chapter-level command.
|
| +\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
|
| +%
|
| +\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
|
| + \let\thiscaption=\empty
|
| + \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
|
| + %
|
| + % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
|
| + %
|
| + % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
|
| + % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
|
| + %
|
| + \startsavinginserts
|
| + %
|
| + % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
|
| + \par
|
| + %
|
| + \vtop\bgroup
|
| + \def\floattype{#1}%
|
| + \def\floatlabel{#2}%
|
| + \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
|
| + %
|
| + \ifx\floattype\empty
|
| + \let\safefloattype=\empty
|
| + \else
|
| + {%
|
| + % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
|
| + % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
|
| + \indexnofonts
|
| + \turnoffactive
|
| + \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
|
| + \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
| + % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
|
| + % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
|
| + %
|
| + \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
|
| + \global\advance\floatno by 1
|
| + %
|
| + {%
|
| + % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
|
| + % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
|
| + % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
|
| + % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
|
| + % lists of floats.
|
| + %
|
| + \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
|
| + \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
|
| + \vskip\parskip
|
| + %
|
| + % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
|
| + \restorefirstparagraphindent
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% we have these possibilities:
|
| +% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
|
| +% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
|
| +% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
|
| +% @float Foo & no caption: Foo
|
| +% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
|
| +% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
|
| +% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
|
| +% @float & no caption:
|
| +%
|
| +\def\Efloat{%
|
| + \let\floatident = \empty
|
| + %
|
| + % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
|
| + \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
|
| + %
|
| + % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
|
| + \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
| + \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
|
| + \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + % the number.
|
| + \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
|
| + % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
|
| + \let\captionline = \floatident
|
| + %
|
| + \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
|
| + \ifx\floatident\empty \else
|
| + \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % caption text.
|
| + \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
|
| + % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
|
| + \ifx\captionline\empty \else
|
| + \vskip.5\parskip
|
| + \captionline
|
| + %
|
| + % Space below caption.
|
| + \vskip\parskip
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
|
| + % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
|
| + \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
|
| + % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
|
| + % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
|
| + % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
|
| + {%
|
| + \atdummies
|
| + %
|
| + % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
|
| + % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
|
| + % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
|
| + \scanexp{%
|
| + \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
|
| + \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
|
| + \thiscaption
|
| + \else
|
| + \thisshortcaption
|
| + \fi
|
| + }%
|
| + }%
|
| + \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
|
| + \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
|
| + }%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \egroup % end of \vtop
|
| + %
|
| + % place the captured inserts
|
| + %
|
| + % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
|
| + % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
|
| + % float. --kasal, 26may04
|
| + %
|
| + \checkinserts
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
|
| + \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @caption, @shortcaption
|
| +%
|
| +\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
|
| +\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
|
| +\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
|
| +\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
|
| +
|
| +% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
|
| +% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
|
| +\def\getfloatno#1{%
|
| + \ifx#1\relax
|
| + % Haven't seen this figure type before.
|
| + \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
|
| + %
|
| + % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
|
| + \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
|
| + \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \let\floatno#1%
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
|
| +% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
|
| +% first read the @float command.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
|
| +
|
| +% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
|
| +% distinguish floats from other xref types.
|
| +\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
|
| +
|
| +% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
|
| +% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
|
| +% \lastsection value which we \setref above.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
|
| +%
|
| +% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
|
| +% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
|
| + \def\temp{#1}%
|
| + \def\iffloattype{#2}%
|
| + \ifx\temp\floatmagic
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
|
| + \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
|
| + {%
|
| + % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
|
| + % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
|
| + \indexnofonts
|
| + \turnoffactive
|
| + \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
|
| + }%
|
| + %
|
| + % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
|
| + \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
|
| + \ifhavexrefs
|
| + % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
|
| + \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
|
| + \fi
|
| + \else
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
|
| + \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
|
| + \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
|
| + \endgroup
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
|
| +% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
|
| +% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
|
| +% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
|
| +%
|
| +% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
|
| +% they won't appear in the aux file).
|
| +%
|
| +\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
|
| +\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
|
| + % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
|
| + % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
|
| + % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
|
| + % in pdf output.
|
| + \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
|
| + %
|
| + % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
|
| + \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
|
| + \writeentry
|
| +}}
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{localization,}
|
| +
|
| +% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
|
| +% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
|
| +% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
|
| +%
|
| +{
|
| + \catcode`\_ = \active
|
| + \globaldefs=1
|
| +\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
|
| + \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames
|
| + \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
|
| + % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
|
| + \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
|
| + \ifeof 1
|
| + \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
|
| + \input txi-#1.tex
|
| + \fi
|
| + \closein 1
|
| + \endgroup % end raw TeX
|
| +\endgroup}
|
| +}
|
| +%
|
| +% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
|
| +% try txi-de.tex.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
|
| + \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
|
| + \ifeof 1
|
| + \errhelp = \nolanghelp
|
| + \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \input txi-#1.tex
|
| + \fi
|
| + \closein 1
|
| +}
|
| +%
|
| +\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
|
| +is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
|
| +directory should work if nowhere else does.}
|
| +
|
| +% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
|
| +% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
|
| +% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
|
| +%
|
| +% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
|
| +% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
|
| +% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
|
| +%
|
| +% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
|
| +% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
|
| +% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
|
| +% accented characters problem.)
|
| +%
|
| +\catcode`@=11
|
| +\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
|
| + % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
|
| + \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
|
| + \message{no patterns for #1}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
|
| + \fi
|
| + % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
|
| + \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
|
| + \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Helpers for encodings.
|
| +% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
|
| + \count255=128
|
| + \loop\ifnum\count255<256
|
| + \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
|
| + \advance\count255 by 1
|
| + \repeat
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
|
| + \count255=128
|
| + \loop\ifnum\count255<256
|
| + \catcode\count255=#1\relax
|
| + \advance\count255 by 1
|
| + \repeat
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
|
| +% according to the specified encoding.
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\documentencoding{%
|
| + % Encoding being declared for the document.
|
| + \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
|
| + % to compare them with \ifx.
|
| + \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
|
| + \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
|
| + \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
|
| + \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
|
| + \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
|
| + %
|
| + \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
|
| + \asciichardefs
|
| + %
|
| + \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
|
| + \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
| + \lattwochardefs
|
| + %
|
| + \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
|
| + \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
| + \latonechardefs
|
| + %
|
| + \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
|
| + \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
| + \latninechardefs
|
| + %
|
| + \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
|
| + \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
| + \utfeightchardefs
|
| + %
|
| + \else
|
| + \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
|
| + %
|
| + \fi % utfeight
|
| + \fi % latnine
|
| + \fi % latone
|
| + \fi % lattwo
|
| + \fi % ascii
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
|
| +% the default font encoding (OT1).
|
| +%
|
| +\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
|
| +
|
| +% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
|
| +\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
|
| +
|
| +% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
|
| +% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
|
| +% macros containing the character definitions.
|
| +\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
|
| +%
|
| +% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
|
| +\def\latonechardefs{%
|
| + \gdef^^a0{~}
|
| + \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
|
| + \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
|
| + \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
|
| + \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
|
| + \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
|
| + \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
|
| + \gdef^^a7{\S}
|
| + \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
|
| + \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
|
| + \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
|
| + \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
|
| + \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
|
| + \gdef^^ad{\-}
|
| + \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
|
| + \gdef^^af{\={}}
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
|
| + \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
|
| + \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
|
| + \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
|
| + \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
|
| + \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
|
| + \gdef^^b6{\P}
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
|
| + \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
|
| + \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
|
| + \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef^^bb{\guilletright}
|
| + \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
|
| + \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
|
| + \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
|
| + \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef^^c0{\`A}
|
| + \gdef^^c1{\'A}
|
| + \gdef^^c2{\^A}
|
| + \gdef^^c3{\~A}
|
| + \gdef^^c4{\"A}
|
| + \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
|
| + \gdef^^c6{\AE}
|
| + \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
|
| + \gdef^^c8{\`E}
|
| + \gdef^^c9{\'E}
|
| + \gdef^^ca{\^E}
|
| + \gdef^^cb{\"E}
|
| + \gdef^^cc{\`I}
|
| + \gdef^^cd{\'I}
|
| + \gdef^^ce{\^I}
|
| + \gdef^^cf{\"I}
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH}}
|
| + \gdef^^d1{\~N}
|
| + \gdef^^d2{\`O}
|
| + \gdef^^d3{\'O}
|
| + \gdef^^d4{\^O}
|
| + \gdef^^d5{\~O}
|
| + \gdef^^d6{\"O}
|
| + \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
|
| + \gdef^^d8{\O}
|
| + \gdef^^d9{\`U}
|
| + \gdef^^da{\'U}
|
| + \gdef^^db{\^U}
|
| + \gdef^^dc{\"U}
|
| + \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
|
| + \gdef^^de{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN}}
|
| + \gdef^^df{\ss}
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef^^e0{\`a}
|
| + \gdef^^e1{\'a}
|
| + \gdef^^e2{\^a}
|
| + \gdef^^e3{\~a}
|
| + \gdef^^e4{\"a}
|
| + \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
|
| + \gdef^^e6{\ae}
|
| + \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
|
| + \gdef^^e8{\`e}
|
| + \gdef^^e9{\'e}
|
| + \gdef^^ea{\^e}
|
| + \gdef^^eb{\"e}
|
| + \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
|
| + \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
|
| + \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
|
| + \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH}}
|
| + \gdef^^f1{\~n}
|
| + \gdef^^f2{\`o}
|
| + \gdef^^f3{\'o}
|
| + \gdef^^f4{\^o}
|
| + \gdef^^f5{\~o}
|
| + \gdef^^f6{\"o}
|
| + \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
|
| + \gdef^^f8{\o}
|
| + \gdef^^f9{\`u}
|
| + \gdef^^fa{\'u}
|
| + \gdef^^fb{\^u}
|
| + \gdef^^fc{\"u}
|
| + \gdef^^fd{\'y}
|
| + \gdef^^fe{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN}}
|
| + \gdef^^ff{\"y}
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
|
| +\def\latninechardefs{%
|
| + % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
|
| + \latonechardefs
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef^^a4{\euro}
|
| + \gdef^^a6{\v S}
|
| + \gdef^^a8{\v s}
|
| + \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
|
| + \gdef^^b8{\v z}
|
| + \gdef^^bc{\OE}
|
| + \gdef^^bd{\oe}
|
| + \gdef^^be{\"Y}
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
|
| +\def\lattwochardefs{%
|
| + \gdef^^a0{~}
|
| + \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
|
| + \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
|
| + \gdef^^a3{\L}
|
| + \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
|
| + \gdef^^a5{\v L}
|
| + \gdef^^a6{\'S}
|
| + \gdef^^a7{\S}
|
| + \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
|
| + \gdef^^a9{\v S}
|
| + \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
|
| + \gdef^^ab{\v T}
|
| + \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
|
| + \gdef^^ad{\-}
|
| + \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
|
| + \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
|
| + \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
|
| + \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
|
| + \gdef^^b3{\l}
|
| + \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
|
| + \gdef^^b5{\v l}
|
| + \gdef^^b6{\'s}
|
| + \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
|
| + \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
|
| + \gdef^^b9{\v s}
|
| + \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
|
| + \gdef^^bb{\v t}
|
| + \gdef^^bc{\'z}
|
| + \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
|
| + \gdef^^be{\v z}
|
| + \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef^^c0{\'R}
|
| + \gdef^^c1{\'A}
|
| + \gdef^^c2{\^A}
|
| + \gdef^^c3{\u A}
|
| + \gdef^^c4{\"A}
|
| + \gdef^^c5{\'L}
|
| + \gdef^^c6{\'C}
|
| + \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
|
| + \gdef^^c8{\v C}
|
| + \gdef^^c9{\'E}
|
| + \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
|
| + \gdef^^cb{\"E}
|
| + \gdef^^cc{\v E}
|
| + \gdef^^cd{\'I}
|
| + \gdef^^ce{\^I}
|
| + \gdef^^cf{\v D}
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE}}
|
| + \gdef^^d1{\'N}
|
| + \gdef^^d2{\v N}
|
| + \gdef^^d3{\'O}
|
| + \gdef^^d4{\^O}
|
| + \gdef^^d5{\H O}
|
| + \gdef^^d6{\"O}
|
| + \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
|
| + \gdef^^d8{\v R}
|
| + \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
|
| + \gdef^^da{\'U}
|
| + \gdef^^db{\H U}
|
| + \gdef^^dc{\"U}
|
| + \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
|
| + \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
|
| + \gdef^^df{\ss}
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef^^e0{\'r}
|
| + \gdef^^e1{\'a}
|
| + \gdef^^e2{\^a}
|
| + \gdef^^e3{\u a}
|
| + \gdef^^e4{\"a}
|
| + \gdef^^e5{\'l}
|
| + \gdef^^e6{\'c}
|
| + \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
|
| + \gdef^^e8{\v c}
|
| + \gdef^^e9{\'e}
|
| + \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
|
| + \gdef^^eb{\"e}
|
| + \gdef^^ec{\v e}
|
| + \gdef^^ed{\'\i}
|
| + \gdef^^ee{\^\i}
|
| + \gdef^^ef{\v d}
|
| + %
|
| + \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE}}
|
| + \gdef^^f1{\'n}
|
| + \gdef^^f2{\v n}
|
| + \gdef^^f3{\'o}
|
| + \gdef^^f4{\^o}
|
| + \gdef^^f5{\H o}
|
| + \gdef^^f6{\"o}
|
| + \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
|
| + \gdef^^f8{\v r}
|
| + \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
|
| + \gdef^^fa{\'u}
|
| + \gdef^^fb{\H u}
|
| + \gdef^^fc{\"u}
|
| + \gdef^^fd{\'y}
|
| + \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
|
| + \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% UTF-8 character definitions.
|
| +%
|
| +% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
|
| +% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
|
| +% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
|
| +%
|
| +\newcount\countUTFx
|
| +\newcount\countUTFy
|
| +\newcount\countUTFz
|
| +
|
| +\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
|
| + \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
|
| +%
|
| +\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
|
| + \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
|
| +%
|
| +\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
|
| + \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
|
| +
|
| +\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
|
| + \ifx #1\relax
|
| + \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \expandafter #1%
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\begingroup
|
| + \catcode`\~13
|
| + \catcode`\"12
|
| +
|
| + \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
|
| + \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
|
| + \uccode`\~\countUTFx
|
| + \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
|
| + \advance\countUTFx by 1
|
| + \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
|
| + \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
|
| + \fi}
|
| +
|
| + \countUTFx = "C2
|
| + \countUTFy = "E0
|
| + \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
|
| + \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
|
| + \UTFviiiLoop
|
| +
|
| + \countUTFx = "E0
|
| + \countUTFy = "F0
|
| + \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
|
| + \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
|
| + \UTFviiiLoop
|
| +
|
| + \countUTFx = "F0
|
| + \countUTFy = "F4
|
| + \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
|
| + \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
|
| + \UTFviiiLoop
|
| +\endgroup
|
| +
|
| +\begingroup
|
| + \catcode`\"=12
|
| + \catcode`\<=12
|
| + \catcode`\.=12
|
| + \catcode`\,=12
|
| + \catcode`\;=12
|
| + \catcode`\!=12
|
| + \catcode`\~=13
|
| +
|
| + \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
|
| + \countUTFz = "#1\relax
|
| + \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
|
| + \begingroup
|
| + \parseXMLCharref
|
| + \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
|
| + \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
|
| + \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
|
| + \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
|
| + \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
|
| + \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
|
| + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
|
| + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
|
| + \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
|
| + \endgroup}
|
| +
|
| + \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
|
| + \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
|
| + \errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| + \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
|
| + \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
|
| + \parseUTFviiiA,%
|
| + \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
|
| + \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
|
| + \parseUTFviiiA;%
|
| + \parseUTFviiiA,%
|
| + \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \parseUTFviiiA;%
|
| + \parseUTFviiiA,%
|
| + \parseUTFviiiA!%
|
| + \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
|
| + \fi\fi\fi
|
| + }
|
| +
|
| + \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
|
| + \countUTFx = \countUTFz
|
| + \divide\countUTFz by 64
|
| + \countUTFy = \countUTFz
|
| + \multiply\countUTFz by 64
|
| + \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
|
| + \advance\countUTFx by 128
|
| + \uccode `#1\countUTFx
|
| + \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
|
| +
|
| + \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
|
| + \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
|
| + \uccode `#3\countUTFz
|
| + \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
|
| +\endgroup
|
| +
|
| +\def\utfeightchardefs{%
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
|
| +
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
|
| + \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
|
| +}% end of \utfeightchardefs
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +% US-ASCII character definitions.
|
| +\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
|
| + \relax
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
|
| +% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
|
| +% document encoding.
|
| +%
|
| +\setnonasciicharscatcode \other
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{formatting,}
|
| +
|
| +\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
|
| +
|
| +\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
| +\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
|
| +\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
|
| +
|
| +% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
|
| +\vbadness = 10000
|
| +
|
| +% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
|
| +\hbadness = 2000
|
| +
|
| +% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
|
| +\widowpenalty=10000
|
| +\clubpenalty=10000
|
| +
|
| +% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
|
| +% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
|
| +% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
|
| +% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\setemergencystretch{%
|
| + \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
|
| + % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
|
| + \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
|
| + \else
|
| + \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
|
| + \fi
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
|
| +% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
|
| +% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
|
| +%
|
| +% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
|
| +% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
|
| + \voffset = #3\relax
|
| + \topskip = #6\relax
|
| + \splittopskip = \topskip
|
| + %
|
| + \vsize = #1\relax
|
| + \advance\vsize by \topskip
|
| + \outervsize = \vsize
|
| + \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
|
| + \pageheight = \vsize
|
| + %
|
| + \hsize = #2\relax
|
| + \outerhsize = \hsize
|
| + \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
|
| + \pagewidth = \hsize
|
| + %
|
| + \normaloffset = #4\relax
|
| + \bindingoffset = #5\relax
|
| + %
|
| + \ifpdf
|
| + \pdfpageheight #7\relax
|
| + \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
|
| + % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
|
| + % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
|
| + \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
|
| + \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
|
| + \fi
|
| + %
|
| + \setleading{\textleading}
|
| + %
|
| + \parindent = \defaultparindent
|
| + \setemergencystretch
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% @letterpaper (the default).
|
| +\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| + \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
| + \textleading = 13.2pt
|
| + %
|
| + % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
|
| + \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
|
| + {\voffset}{.25in}%
|
| + {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
|
| + {11in}{8.5in}%
|
| +}}
|
| +
|
| +% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
|
| +\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| + \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
|
| + \textleading = 12pt
|
| + %
|
| + \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
|
| + {-.2in}{0in}%
|
| + {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
|
| + {9.25in}{7in}%
|
| + %
|
| + \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
|
| + \tolerance = 700
|
| + \hfuzz = 1pt
|
| + \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
| + \defbodyindent = .5cm
|
| +}}
|
| +
|
| +% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
|
| +% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
|
| +\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| + \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
|
| + \textleading = 12pt
|
| + %
|
| + \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
|
| + {-.2in}{-.4in}%
|
| + {0pt}{14pt}%
|
| + {9in}{6in}%
|
| + %
|
| + \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
|
| + \tolerance = 700
|
| + \hfuzz = 1pt
|
| + \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
| + \defbodyindent = .4cm
|
| +}}
|
| +
|
| +% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
|
| +\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| + \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
| + \textleading = 13.2pt
|
| + %
|
| + % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
|
| + % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
|
| + % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
|
| + % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
|
| + % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
|
| + % your texinfo source file like this:
|
| + % @tex
|
| + % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
|
| + % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
|
| + % @end tex
|
| + \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
|
| + {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
|
| + {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
| + {297mm}{210mm}%
|
| + %
|
| + \tolerance = 700
|
| + \hfuzz = 1pt
|
| + \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
| + \defbodyindent = 5mm
|
| +}}
|
| +
|
| +% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
|
| +% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
|
| +% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
|
| +\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| + \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
|
| + \textleading = 12.5pt
|
| + %
|
| + \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
|
| + {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
|
| + {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
|
| + {210mm}{148mm}%
|
| + %
|
| + \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
|
| + \tolerance = 800
|
| + \hfuzz = 1.2pt
|
| + \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
| + \defbodyindent = 2mm
|
| + \tableindent = 12mm
|
| +}}
|
| +
|
| +% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
|
| +\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| + \afourpaper
|
| + \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
|
| + {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
|
| + {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
|
| + {297mm}{210mm}%
|
| + %
|
| + % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
|
| + \globaldefs = 0
|
| +}}
|
| +
|
| +% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
|
| +\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| + \afourpaper
|
| + \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
|
| + {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
|
| + {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
|
| + {297mm}{210mm}%
|
| + \globaldefs = 0
|
| +}}
|
| +
|
| +% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
|
| +% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
|
| +% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
|
| +%
|
| +\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
|
| +\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
|
| + \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
|
| + \globaldefs = 1
|
| + %
|
| + \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
| + \setleading{\textleading}%
|
| + %
|
| + \dimen0 = #1\relax
|
| + \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
|
| + %
|
| + \dimen2 = \hsize
|
| + \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
|
| + %
|
| + \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
|
| + {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
|
| + {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
| + {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
|
| +}}
|
| +
|
| +% Set default to letter.
|
| +%
|
| +\letterpaper
|
| +
|
| +
|
| +\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
|
| +
|
| +% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
|
| +\catcode`\^^? = 14
|
| +
|
| +% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
|
| +\catcode`\"=\other
|
| +\catcode`\~=\other
|
| +\catcode`\^=\other
|
| +\catcode`\_=\other
|
| +\catcode`\|=\other
|
| +\catcode`\<=\other
|
| +\catcode`\>=\other
|
| +\catcode`\+=\other
|
| +\catcode`\$=\other
|
| +\def\normaldoublequote{"}
|
| +\def\normaltilde{~}
|
| +\def\normalcaret{^}
|
| +\def\normalunderscore{_}
|
| +\def\normalverticalbar{|}
|
| +\def\normalless{<}
|
| +\def\normalgreater{>}
|
| +\def\normalplus{+}
|
| +\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
|
| +
|
| +% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
|
| +% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
|
| +% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
|
| +%
|
| +% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
|
| +% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
|
| +% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
|
| +% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
|
| +%
|
| +\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
| +
|
| +% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
|
| +% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
|
| +% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
|
| +% this is not a problem.
|
| +\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
| +
|
| +% Turn off all special characters except @
|
| +% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
|
| +% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
|
| +% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
|
| +
|
| +\catcode`\"=\active
|
| +\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
|
| +\let"=\activedoublequote
|
| +\catcode`\~=\active
|
| +\def~{{\tt\char126}}
|
| +\chardef\hat=`\^
|
| +\catcode`\^=\active
|
| +\def^{{\tt \hat}}
|
| +
|
| +\catcode`\_=\active
|
| +\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
|
| +\let\realunder=_
|
| +% Subroutine for the previous macro.
|
| +\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
|
| +
|
| +\catcode`\|=\active
|
| +\def|{{\tt\char124}}
|
| +\chardef \less=`\<
|
| +\catcode`\<=\active
|
| +\def<{{\tt \less}}
|
| +\chardef \gtr=`\>
|
| +\catcode`\>=\active
|
| +\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
|
| +\catcode`\+=\active
|
| +\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
|
| +\catcode`\$=\active
|
| +\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
|
| +
|
| +% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
|
| +% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
|
| +% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
|
| +% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
|
| +\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
|
| +
|
| +% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
|
| +% parsing them.
|
| +\def\turnoffactive{%
|
| + \normalturnoffactive
|
| + \otherbackslash
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +\catcode`\@=0
|
| +
|
| +% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
|
| +% as in \char`\\.
|
| +\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
|
| +\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
|
| +
|
| +% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
|
| +% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
|
| +{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
|
| +
|
| +% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
|
| +% in fixed width font.
|
| +\catcode`\\=\active
|
| +@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}}
|
| +% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
|
| +% @let \ = @normalbackslash
|
| +
|
| +% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
|
| +% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
|
| +% catcode other.
|
| +@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
|
| +@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
|
| +
|
| +% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
|
| +% the literal character `\'.
|
| +%
|
| +@def@normalturnoffactive{%
|
| + @let\=@normalbackslash
|
| + @let"=@normaldoublequote
|
| + @let~=@normaltilde
|
| + @let^=@normalcaret
|
| + @let_=@normalunderscore
|
| + @let|=@normalverticalbar
|
| + @let<=@normalless
|
| + @let>=@normalgreater
|
| + @let+=@normalplus
|
| + @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
|
| + @markupsetuplqdefault
|
| + @markupsetuprqdefault
|
| + @unsepspaces
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
|
| +% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
|
| +@otherifyactive
|
| +
|
| +% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
|
| +% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
|
| +% a backslash.
|
| +%
|
| +@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
|
| +@global@let\ = @eatinput
|
| +
|
| +% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
|
| +% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
|
| +% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
|
| +% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
|
| +% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
|
| +%
|
| +@gdef@fixbackslash{%
|
| + @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
|
| + @catcode`+=@active
|
| + @catcode`@_=@active
|
| +}
|
| +
|
| +% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
|
| +@escapechar = `@@
|
| +
|
| +% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
|
| +@catcode`@& = @other
|
| +@catcode`@# = @other
|
| +@catcode`@% = @other
|
| +
|
| +@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
|
| +@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
|
| +@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
|
| +@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
|
| +@catcode`@'=@active
|
| +@catcode`@`=@active
|
| +@markupsetuplqdefault
|
| +@markupsetuprqdefault
|
| +
|
| +@c Local variables:
|
| +@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
|
| +@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
|
| +@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
|
| +@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
|
| +@c time-stamp-end: "}"
|
| +@c End:
|
| +
|
| +@c vim:sw=2:
|
| +
|
| +@ignore
|
| + arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
|
| +@end ignore
|
|
|
Chromium Code Reviews
Issue 10807020:
Add native Windows binary for bison. (Closed)
Base URL: svn://chrome-svn/chrome/trunk/deps/third_party/